Skip to main content

Full text of "Investigation of concentration of economic power; monograph no. 1[-43]"

See other formats


*i»i!S«««il 


muuiiuitimi: 


mHp} 


hi)'' 


Pi 

m 


:|il 


pill 


7  Congress],        SENATE  COMMITTEE  PRINT 

ou  Session 


INVESTIGATION  OF  CONCENTRATION 
OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 


TEMPOBARY  NATIONAL  ECONOMIC 
COMMITTEE 

A  STUDY  MADE  FOR  THE  TEMPORARY  NATIONAL 
ECONOMIC  COMMITTEE,  SEVENTY-SIXTH  CONGRESS, 
THIRD  SESSION,  PURSUANT  TO  PUBLIC  RESOLUTION 
NO.  118  (SEVENTY-FIFTH  CONGRESS)  AUTHORIZING  AND 
DIRECTING  A  SELECT  COMMITTEE  TO  MAKE  A  FULL 
AND  COMPLETE  STUDY  AND  INVESTIGATION  WITH  RE- 
SPECT TO  THE  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 
IN,  AND  FINANCIAL  CONTROL  OVER,  PRODUCTION  AND 
DISTRIBUTION  OF  GOODS  AND  SERVICES 


MONOGRAPH  No.  43 

THE  MOTION  PICTURE  INDUSTRY 
A  PATTERN  OF  CONTROL 


Printed  for  the  use  of  the 
Temporary  National  Economic  Committee 


UNITED   STATES 

GOVERNMENT   PRINTING   OFFICE 

WASHINGTON  :   1941 


TEMPORARY  NATIONAL  ECONOMIC  COMMITTEE 

(Created  pursuant  to  Public  Res.  113,  75th  Cong.) 

JOSEPH  C.  O'MAHONEY,  Senator  from  Wyoming,  Chairman 
HATTON  W.  SUMNERS,  Representative  fro,u  Texas,  Vice  Chairman 
WILLIAM  H.  KINO,  Senator  from  Utah 
WALLACE  H.  WHITE,  Jr.,  Senator  from  Maine 
CLYDE  WILLIAMS,  Representative  from  Missouri 
B.  CARROLL  REECE,  Representative  from  Tenne.ssee 

THURMAN  W.  ARNOLD,  Assistant  Attorney  General, 
•HUGH  COX,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Attorney  General, 
Representing  the  Department  of  Justice 
JEROME  N.  FRANK,  Chairman 

•SUMNER  T.  PIKE,  Commissioner, 

Representing  the  Securities  and  Exchange  Commission 
GARLAND  S.  FERGUSON,  Commissioner, 
•EWIN  L.  DAVIS.  Chairman. 

Representing  the  Federal  Trade  Commission 
ISADOR  LUBIN,  Commissioner  of  Labor  Statistics, 

'A.  FORD  HINRICHS.  Chief  Economist,  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics, 
Representing  the  Department  of  LabT)r 
JOSEPH  J.  O'CONNELL,  Jr.,  Special  Assistant  to  the  General  Counsel, 
•CHARLES  L.  KADES.  Special  Assistant  to  the  General  Counsel. 
Representing  the  Department  of  tlie  Treasury 
WAYNE  C.  TAYLOR,  Under  Secretary  of  Commerce, 

*M.  JOSEPH  MEEHAN,  Chief  Statistician,  Bureau  of  Foreign  and 
Domestic  Commerce, 
Representing  the  Department  of  Commerce 


Leon  Henderson,  Economic  Coordinator 
Dewey  Anderson,  Executive  Secretary 
Theodore  J.  Kreps,  Economic  Adviser 


•Alternates 


Monograph  No.  43 
The  Motion-Picture  Industry— A  Pattern  of  Control 

DANIEL  BERTRAND 
W.  DUANE  EVAN'^ 
E.  L.   BLANCHARD 


ACKNOWLEDGMENT 


This  monograph  was  written  by 
DANIEL  BERTRAND 

Administrative  Assistant,  Temporary   National   Economic    Committee 

W.  DUANE  EVANS 

Senior  Economist,  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics,  United  States  Department 

oj  Labor 

E.  L.  BLANCHARD 

Member,  Temporary  National  Economic  Committee  Staff 

The. Temporary  National  Economic  Committee  is  greatly  indebted 
to  these  authors  for  their  contribution  to  the  literature  of  the  subject 
under  reviev^ 

The  status  oJ  the  materials  in  the  volume  is  precisely  the  same  as  that  of 
other  carefully  prepared  testimony  when  given  by  individual  witnesses; 
it  is  information  submitted  for  committee  deliberation.  No  matter  what 
the  official  capacity  of  the  witness  or  author  may  be,  the  publication  of  his 
testimony,  report,  or  monograph  by  the  committee  in  no  way  signifies  nor 
implies  assent  to,  or  approval  of,  any  of  the  facts,  opinion,  or  recommenda- 
tions, nor  acceptance  thereof  in  whole  or  in  part  by  the  members  of  the 
Temporary  National  Economic  Committee,  individually  or  collectively. 
Sole  and  undivided  responsibility  for  every  statement  in  such  testimony ^ 
report,  or  monographs  rests  entirely  upon  the  respective  authors. 

(Signed)     JOSEPH  C.  O'MAHONEY, 
Chairman,  Temporary  National  Economic  Committee. 

Ill 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


Page 

Letter  of  transmittal ^^ 

Introduction ^i 

Chapter  I.  The  pattern * 

Development  of  the  pattern | 

Crystallization  of  the  pattern ^ 

Chapter  II.  The  issues VV-V oo 

Block  booking,  blind  selling,  and  the  forcmg  of  shorts ^^ 

Block  booking *^ 

Forcing  of  short  subjects ^° 

Blind  selling ^^ 

Designated  play  dates ^* 

Other  practices  affecting  distributor-exhibitor  relationships ^o 

Overbuying ^^ 

Selective  contracts ^^ 

Clearance  and  zoning ,- ^V 

Unfairly  specified  admission  prices.  ^. *^ 

Other  practices  affecting  relationships  between  exhibitors 47 

Chapter  III.  Observations ^^ 

APPENDIXES 

I.  The  eight  major  companies — ^^ 

II.  The  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  Inc.,  or 

the  Hays  organization ^^ 

III.  The  consent  decree ' '•* 


TABLES 

Page 

1.  Number  of  feature   length   motion   pictures  produced  in   the   United 

States  by  all  producing  companies,  and  by  each  oi  the  major  pro- 
ducing companies,  by  seasons,  1930-31  to  1938-39 9 

2.  Number  of  theaters  operated  by  each  of  the  major  companies,  1940 10 

3.  Number  of  first-run  metropolitan  theaters  operated  by  each  ot  the 

major  companies  in  35  key  cities,  1940 11 

4.  Cities  with  populations  of  100,000  or  more  in  which  exhibition  is  con- 

trolled by  major  companies 12 

5.  Control  of  exhibition  facilities  by  a  single  major  company  in  each  of 

four  localities.  1939 13 

6.  Number  of  loans  by  major  companies  since  1933 14 

VII 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL 

January  15,  1941. 
Hon.  Joseph  C.  O'Mahoney, 

Chairman,  Temporary  National  Economic  Committee, 

United  States  Senate,  Washington,  D.  C. 

My  Dear  Senator:  The  monograph,  The  Motion  Picture  Indus- 
try— A  Pattern  of  Control,  is  submitted  for  the  information  of  the 
Committee.  It  was  prepared  by  Mr.  Duane  Evans,  senior  economist 
in  the  Department  of  Labor,  Mr.  Daniel  Bertrand,  administrative 
assistant  to  the  executive  secretary  of  the  Temporary  National 
Economic  Committee,  and  Miss  Edna  Blanchard,  member  of  the 
T.  N.  E.  C.  staff.  The  Department  of  Labor  generously  detailed 
Mr.  Evans 'temporarily  to  the  Committee  to  assist  in  the  preparation 
of  this  report.  The  study  grew  out  of  the  continued  interest  in  the 
economic  problems  of  the  industry  of  Mr.  Evans  and  Mr.  Bertrand 
since  the  N.  R.  A.  period,  when  both  were  connected  with  the  admin- 
istration of  the  code  of  fair  competition  for  the  motion  picture  industry. 

This  study  gives  a  concise  treatment  of  the  economic  development 
of  the  motion  picture  industry  and  the  problems  raised  by  its  rapid 
growth  and  its  present-domination  by  a  few  large  companies.  It  is  of 
particular  importance  in  the  studies  of  the  concentration  of  economic 
power  for  the  span  of  time  involved  is  so  short,  and  the  events  so  recent, 
that  the  pattern  of  control  can  be  kept  constantly  before  the  reader. 
Thus,  the  monograph  offers  evidence  of  the  ways  in  which  great  aggre- 
gates of  economic  power  are  created  and  the  methods  used  in  their  oper- 
ation. The  struggle  for  dominance  goes  forward  ruthlessly,  with 
ofttimes  little  regard  for  the  motion  picture  industry's  social  responsi- 
bilities. Finally,  as  power  has  become  lodged  in  a  few  hands,  it  has 
become  necessary  for  the  Department  of  Justice  to  take  steps  to  protect 
the  public  interest.  After  prolonged  discussion  and  litigation  a  con- 
sent decree  has  been  entered  into  between  that  Department  and  the 
industry.  This  decree  is  analyzed  in  the  present  report,  together  with 
certain  observations  as  to  its  eft'ect  on  the  problems  which  it  seeks 
to  solve. 

The  authors  have  been  careful  to  present  a  factual  description  of 
the  motion  picture  industry  as  an  important  economic  structure.  They 
do  not  moralize,  nor  make  judgments  concerning  the  events,  good  and 
bad,  which  they  describe.  Conclusions  are  not  recommendations  but 
summaries  of  the  facts.  The  monograph,  therefore,  serves  a  very 
useful  purpose  in  its  collection  and  condensation  of  data  on  the 
motion  picture  industry.  It  should  be  of  inestimable  value  to  the 
congressional  committees  vested  with  the  duty  of  reviewing  proposed 
legislation  which  occurs  each  year. 

Respectfully  submitted. 

Theodore  J.  Kreps, 

Economic  Adviser. 


INTRODUCTION 


An  outstanding  lesson  of  history  is  that  -security,  political  or  eco- 
nomic, is  perhaps  best  achieved  through  organization  and  coordinated 
activity.  The  early  economic  theorists  postulated  numerous  small 
units  struggling  with  each  other  under  a  rule  of  "free  competition" 
which  required  that  those  least  fitted  for  the  conflict,  the  "  sub-marginal 
establishments,"  should  inevitably  be  the  losers.  This  is  not  coinci- 
dence, since  these  conditions  characterized  the  more  primitive  forms 
of  business  organization.  But  just  as  individuals  learned  that  there 
was  safety  in  numbers,  so  business  units  learned  there  was  safety  in 
size,  and  today  economists  must  concern  themselves  with  the  conse- 
quences of  combination  as  well  as  those  of  competition. 

In  the  United  States  at  the  end  of  the  last  century  there  was  a  rusn 
to  form  huge  combines.  In  the  process  of  formation  of  these  "trusts," 
huge  business  units  sometimes  clashed  in  economic  warfare,  with  still 
greater  power  the  prize  for  the  victor  and  absorption  the  consequence 
to  the  vanquished. 

In  these  battles  of  giants  the  consumer  was  in  the  position  of  inno- 
cent bystander.  During  the  warfare  he  frequently  benefited,  but 
when  the  struggle  ended  the  victor  usually  turned  to  him  and 
demanded  tribute  in  the  form  of  higher  prices.  Sometimes  the  con- 
flict was  ended  or  avoided  by  agreement;  the  result  to  the  consumer 
was  the  same. 

When  free  competition  prevailed,  the  consumer  was  the  final 
arbiter,  the  referee.  After  combination  had  run  its  course  and  a 
monopoly  or  near  monopoly  was  achieved,  he  lost  this  power.  Once 
strong  and  now  weak,  he  could  defend  himself  only  collectively, 
through  the  Government  as  his  representative.  The  "trust-busting" 
campaigns  of  the  early  1900's,  the  Sherman  Act  and  the  Clayton  Act, 
all  were  efforts  on  the  part  of  the  Government  to  restore  to  the  con- 
sumer a  measure  of  the  protection  which  had  previously  been  afforded 
him  by  competition. 

These  legislative  efforts  were  designed  to  break  up  the  existing  giant 
combines  and  prevent  the  formation  of  new  ones.  They  did  not,  how- 
ever, strike  at  the  cause  of  formation  of  these  combines.  Size  still 
conferred  an  advantage  in  the  business  struggle.  The  process  of  dog- 
eat-dog  was  permitted  to  continue,  but  was  halted  one  step  short  of 
completion.  The  complex  of  economic  forces  brought  about  combina- 
tion of  business  units  into  fewer  and  larger  entities,  but  the  rules  laid 
down  by  Government  prevented  ultimate  combination  into  a  single 
industrial  giant  completely  monopolizing  one  line  of  human  activity. 
Industry  after  industry  then  fell  into  a  common  and  familiar  pattern. 
Instead  of  the  multitude  of  individually  small  establishments  visioned 


XII  INTRODUCTION 

by  the  classical  economist,  the  end  product  was  an  industry  dominated 
by  a  few  large  closely-organized  corporations.' 

Denied  the  prize  of  an  ultimate  monopoly,  these  industrial  leaders 
sought  for  "the  next  best  thing." 

It  was  early  discovered  that  price  competition  was  no  longer  desir- 
able from  the  standpoint  of  these  large  companies.  Price  cuts  were 
necessarily  met  by  competitors,  so  no  permanent  advantage  in  the 
form  of  a  larger  share  of  the  market  was  likely  to  result.  The  only 
inevitable  consequence  was  that  the  profits  of  all  concerned  would  be 
reduced.  Price  warfare  was  then  seldom  resorted  to  unless  a  specific 
end,  with  reasonable  surety  of  its  attainment,  was  in  view.^  Business 
had  now  achieved  the  moral  level  of  diplomacy. 

Out  of  the  realization  that  some  forms  of  competition  were  mutually 
disadvantageous  was  born  a  new  era  for  business,  symbolized  by  a 
new  watchword  and  battle  cry.  It  is  heard  on  every  side,  and  it  is 
"cooperation." 

Cooperation  extends  further  than  a  recognition  that  price-cutting 
gives  no  lasting  advantage  to  the  person  instituting  it.  It  extends  to 
preservation  of  the  status-quo — the  system  under  which  the  con- 
sumer, no  longer  protected  by  constant  competition  in  the  matter  of 
prices,  can  be  made  to  pay  for  all  this  industrial  goodwill.  Coopera- 
tion is  then  seldom  a  positive  force;  it  is  generally  aimed  at  preventing 
change.  Certain  positive  services  may  result.  An  example  is  the 
reporting  and  publishing  of  prices  which  is  done  by  many  trade  asso- 
ciations. But  here  the  objective  is  less  to -provide  the  consumer  with 
a  guide  than  it  is  to  prevent  the  uninitiated  or  uninformed  from 
thoughtlessly  quoting  prices  below  the  going  level. 

Less  openly,  cooperation  frequently  takes  forms  which  are  designed 
to  prevent  the  intrusion  of  new  competitors  into  the  business  or  in- 
dustrial field.  Consequently,  there  has  grown  up  in  a  number  of 
industries  a  more  or  less  clear-cut  distinction  between  the  major  in- 
terests, those  large  companies  who  virtually  control  and  manage  the 
affairs  of  the  industry  for  their  mutual  benefit,  and  the  independents 
(or  outsiders).  This  has  come  about  through  the  fear  that  the 
smaller  enterprises,  in  their  attempts  to  capture  a  larger  portion  of  the 
business  and  so  gain  admittance  to  the  inner  circle,  might  in  some  way 
disturb  a  situation  deemed  satisfactory  by  the  controlling  interests. 

The  picture  drawn  above  is  not  an  uncommon  one.  It  gives  a 
rough  outline  of  the  development  of  the  motion  picture  industry.  In 
its  case  some  of  the  steps  are  clearer,  since  the  motion  picture  industry 
is  in  many  ways  a  youngster  among  its  industrial  cousins.  Accord- 
ingly, in  the  space  of  a  relatively  few  years  it  has  changed  from  an 
activity  in  the  hands  of  a  large  number  of  small  and  financially  weak 
individuals  to  an  industry  controlled  by  a  few  large  companies  which 
dominate  its  policies  and  control  its  actions. 

'  For  an  indication  of  the  extent  to  which  combination  has  been  carried  in  American  enterprise,  cf.  Tem- 
porary National  Economic  Committee,  Monograph  27,  "Structure  of  Industry,"  Part  V,  "Concentration 
of  Production  in  Manufncturins,"  Walter  F.  Crowder,  1940. 

'  Cf.  the  action  of  the  P.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  in  reducing  the  listed  wholesale  price  of  Camel  cigar- 
ettes from  .$6.15  to  $6  per  thou.sand  in  April  1928,  reported  in  the  trade  press  to  be  the  result  of  Reynolds' 
determination  to  force  another  cigarette  manufacturer  to  stop  giving  especially  large  discounts  to  mass 
buyers.  (United  Tobacco  Journal,  April  28,  1928,  p.  7,  and  Printers'  Ink,  May  3,  1928,  p.  182.)  The  price 
<;ut  was  rescinded  by  an  increase  to  $6.40  per  thousand  in  October  1929. 


CHAPTER  I 

THE  PATTERN 


CHAPTER  I 

THE  PATTERN 

DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  PATTERN  ^ 

The  motion  picture  industry  had  its  inception  near  the  beginning 
of  the  present  century  as  a  "peep  show"  form  of  entertainment  confined 
to  backrooms  and  unused  shops  in  a  few.  large  cities.  Immediately 
popular  and  showing  promise  of  large  profits,  it  attracted  the  atten- 
tion of  entrepreneurs,  speculators,  investors,  and  other  mid-wives  of 
business.  With  their  not  wholly  disinterested  assistance,  the  infant 
industry  was  born. 

As  it  grew  up,  it  donned  the  outworn  vestments  of  its  not  always 
respectable  older  cousins — vaudeville  and  the  legitimate  stage — by 
moving  into  closed  or  abandoned  theaters  formerly  devoted  to  these 
types  of  entertainment.  But,  lusty  and  vital,  the  infant  soon  out- 
grew these  hand-me-downs,  and  in  1-914  it  made  its  first  appearance 
on  Broadway  in  a  theater  built  exclusively  for  showing  motion 
pictures. 

Today  in  the  billion-dollar  class,  the  industry  has  passed  through 
a  whirlwind  development — rapid  and  successful.  The  meteoric  rise 
and  fall  of  personalities  connected  with  the  industry  have  been  as 
vivid  as  any  celluloid  romance.  Beginning  as  a  flickering  novelty, 
the  motion  picture  today  lives,  tells  a  story,  dispenses  news,  and  even 
teaches  in  our  schools.  Once  silent,  it  now  sings,  and  the  grey  and 
jerky  images  of  its  early  days  have  been  steadied  and  given  color. 

From  its  beginning  the  industry  has  been  characterized  by  some 
form  of  domination.  It  started  in  the  hands  of  three  companies — 
Edison,  Biograph,  and  Vitagraph — who  owned  the  principal  patents 
covering  the  manufacture  of  equipment  and  film.  These  companies 
at  first  derived  their  profits  more  from  the  sale  of  equipment  than 
from  the  sale  of  films. 

The  early  motion  picture  films  were  produced  on  small  budgets; 
they  were  short  and  could  be  exhibited  in  a  few  minutes.  Audience 
turnover  was  rapid.  The  subject  matter  of  these  films  was  usually 
trivial — prize  fights,  dancers,  incidents  on  park  benches,  and  the  like. 
Prints  were  sold  outright,  and  their  value  depended  principally  on 
their  novelty. 

As  the  popularity  of  this  form  of  entertainment  spread,  increased 
production  became  necessary  to  meet  the  public  demand.  A  great 
many  small  producers  and  film  distributors  entered  the  field,  but  these 
newcomers  at  first  constituted  no  immediate  threat  to  the  controlling 
interests. 

At  this  time  a  fundamental  change  in  the  business  methods  of  the 
industry  took  place.     As  matters  stood,  films  lost  value  to  an  exhibitor 

'  The  following  sources  have  been  freely  consulted,  in  the  preparation  of  this  section:  Lewis  Jacobs,  ''The 
Rise  of  the  American  Film,"  Harcourt,  Brace  &  Co.,  New  York,  1939;  Howard  T.  Lewis,  "The  Motion 
Picture  Industry,"  D.  Van  Nostrand  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  1933;  Terry  Ramsaye.  "A  Million  and  One 
Niehts",  Simon  &  Schuster,  New  York.  1926:  National  Recovery  Administration,  "The  Motion  Picture 
Industry  Study,"  Work  Materials  No.  34,  1936. 


4  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

as  their  novelty  was  exhausted,  so  exhibitors  traded  films  with  each 
other.  It  was  soon  realized  that  the  owner  of  a  stock  of  films  could 
make  a  profit  by  renting  a  single  print  to  a  nurhber  of  exhibitors  in 
succession,  -thus  relieving  these  exhibitors  from  the  necessity  of 
making  a  cash  investment  in  films.  Consequently,  the  original  method 
of  outright  sale  of  films  to  exhibitors  was  replaced  by  a  licensing  system. 
Under  this  system,  title  to  the  film  remained  with  exchange  men,  and 
each  film  was  licensed  to  various  exhibitors  until  the  print  was  no 
longer  usable.     This  method  of  film  distribution  is  still  in  use  today. 

In  1908,  mainly  to  escape  the  effects  of  a  patent  war  conducted 
chiefly  by  the  Edison  companies  which  held  basic  camera  and  projec- 
tion equipment  patents,  the  10  leaamg  interests  in  the  industry 
organized  the  first  trust — the  Motion  Picture  Patents  Co.*  All 
patent  interests  and  rights  were  pooled,  and  the  cooperating  companies 
were  licensed  to  manufacture  and  lease  motion  pictures.  The  East- 
man Kodak  Co.  cooperated  by  refusing  to  supply  raw  film  to  non- 
licensed  manufacturers.  Films  produced  by  the  "patents  pool" 
were  handled  by  licensed  exchange  men  who  agreed  to  sell  only  to 
theaters  with  licensed  projectors,  and  the  exliibitors  were  required 
to  pay  for  the  right  to  use  projectors  in  addition  to  film  rentals. 
Through  this  system  of  licensing,  the  pool  attempted  control  of  the 
entire  industry. 

Resentment  from  those  outside  the  "trust"  took  the  form  of 
bootlegging  of  films  and  projectors;  protective  organizations  were 
formed  and  these  organizations  in  turn  prospered.  Even  licensed 
exchanges  violated  their  contracts. 

To  clieck  this  adverse  trend,  the  patents  pool  in  1910  organized 
57  of  the  58  exchanges  then  in  existence  into  the  General  Film  Co. 
to  distribute  the  films  of  the  10  producers  on  a  national  scale.  These 
licensed  exchanges  agi^eed  to  buy  only  "trust"  pictures. 

Despite  the  attempt  to  monopolize  production  and  control  distri- 
bution, the  independent  companies  multiplied,  flourished,  and  con- 
tinued making  pictures.  By  1912  dozens  of  new  producers  and  dis- 
tributors, led  by  William  Fox,  operator  of  the  fifty-eighth  exchange, 
were  offering  the  trust  keen  opposition.  In  this  year  a  lawsuit  was 
instituted  against  the  trust  as  an  imlawful  conspiracy  in  restraint  of 
trade.  With  antitrust  sentiment  sweeping  the  country,  the  General 
Film  Co.  was  dissolved  by  the  Federal  courts  in  1915.  In  1917,  the 
United  States  Supreme  Court  held,  after  years  of  hearings,  that  the 
patents  company  could  not  enforce  exclusive  use  of  licensed  film  on 
patented  projectors  in  theaters,  and  the  trust  was  declared  legally 
dead. 

Concomitant  with  the  fight  over  patent  rights  was  the  controversy 
between  short  and  the  newly  introduced  feature-length  films.  The 
trust,  interested  primarily  in  quick  and  inexpensive  production, 
greeted  feature-length  films  with  distaste  and  refused  to  distribute 
them.  The  independent  companies,  encouraged  bj^  the  trust's 
reactionary  policy,  produced  full-length  features  and  sold  exhibition 
rights  to  individual  distributors  each  representing  one  or  more  States. 
These  exchange  men  became  known  as  "States'  rights  distributors." 
They  were  so  successful  that  in  1914  a  number  of  them  joined  with  a 

*  Edison,  Biogranli,  VitaEraph,  Essanay,  Selig,  Lubin,  and  Kalem,  domestic  manufacturers;  Melies 
and  Pathe,  French  oompauies;  and  George  Kleine.  distributor. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  5 

few  independent  exhibitors  to  form  tlie  Paramount  Pictun^s  Corpora- 
tion, which  financed  and  distributed  feature-length  pictures  produced 
by  affiUated  independent  studios.  Tliis  organization  assured  exhibi- 
tors a  steady  supply  of  features  and  the  studios  a  steady  market  for 
their  product. 

The  war  years  saw  rapid  growth  of  the  industry.  In  1914  America 
supplied  half  of  the  world  movie  production;  by  1917  nearly  all  the 
world's  motion  pictures  were  produced  in  the  United  States.  Increased 
profits,  increased  costs,  and  expansion  in  every  direction  were  part  of 
the  war  boom.  Competition  became  more  ruthless.  Old  corpora- 
tions gave  way  to  new  ones.  The  industry  had  assumed  the  propor- 
tions of  a  large-scale  operation  depending  on  a  mass  market. 

Up  to  this  time  exhibitors  had  been  interested  primarily  in  having 
a  regular  supply  of  new  reels  regardless  of  quality.  The  introduction 
of  the  feature  picture  and  the  star  system  made  equality  a  more 
important  factor,  and  the  production  of  more  pretentious  films  was 
expanded. 

A  new  problem  arose  to  engage  the  attention  of  producers.  Theaters 
were  numerous  and  widely  scattered  throughout  the  nation,  and 
producers  had  to  rely  on  distributors  for  efficient  distribution  of  their 
product.  But,  since  distributors  handled  the  product  of  many 
producers,  the  individual  producer  found  himself  at  the  mercy  of  the 
distributor.  With  the  recognition  that  full  exploitation  of  their  films 
could  be  accomplished  only  through  securing  control  of  distribution, 
the  producers  established  affiliations  for  that  purpose  (see  appendix 
I).  This  period  as  well  as  the  early  years  after  the  war  can  indeed 
be  described  as  one  of  large-scale  economic  warfare  between  powerful 
organizations  for  control  of  the  industry. 

During  the  war  years  Paramount  developed  block  booking,  a  plan 
whereby  exhibitors  contracted  in  advance  to  buy  a  number  of  films  to 
be  made  within  a  stipulated  time.  This  plan,  helping  in  great  part  to 
effect  quantity  distribution,  was  advantageous  to  producers  since  it 
assured  them  of  a  steady  outlet  for  their  films. 

Exhibitors  were  confronted  with  the  necessity  of  depending  on  the 
block-booking  system  controlled  by  the  producer-distributors,  much  to 
the  economic  disadvantage  of  the  former.  Consequently,  this  method 
of  sale  was  opposed  almost  from  its  inception  by  independent 
exhibitors. 

The  animosity  against  block  booking  became  so  great  that  in  1917 
27  large  exhibitors  controlling  important  theaters  in  key  cities  com- 
bined and  established  their  own  distribution  channel — First  National 
Exhibitors  Circuit.  This  organization  was  established  to  combat 
the  high  prices  of  big-star  pictures  and  the  selling  policy  of  the 
major  producers.^  Production  and  distribution  units  financed  by  the 
organization  attempted  to  provide  a  constant  supply  of  pictures  to 
members.     Finally,  First  National  established  its  own  studios. 

First  National's  entry  into  the  production  branch  had  important 
consequences.  The  larger  producer-distributors  lost  exhibitor-cus- 
tomers and  their  market  for  pictures  was  threatened.  In  the  case  of 
Famous  Players  Lasky,  stars,  directors,  and  other  personnel  left  for 

/  f  "^'u  "P^"^'  ^^™°*^^  Players  Lasky  Corporation,  which  through  its  president,  Adolph  Zukor,  had  most 
of  the  big  name  stars  under  contract  and  required  exhibitors  to  purchase  all  their  product  in  order  to  secure 
Ihe  more  p6pular  pictures,  like  those  featuri-ng  Mary  Pickford. 

2s;6782— 41— No.  43 2 


Q  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

First  National.  The  trade  war  extended  to  problems  arising  from 
pricing  of  pictures,  competition  for  desirable  play  dates,  and  the  whole 
problem  of  booking.  In  1918  block  booking  was  temporarily  aban- 
doned. 

The  struggle  for  supremacy  in  the  industry,  formerly  based  on 
patent  control  and  market  monopoly,  now  emerged  in  a  fierce  battle 
for  theaters.  Large  theater  holdings  strengthened  bargaining  power, 
and  the  fight  for  control  of  outlets  became  the  order  of  the  day. 
(See  appendix  I.)  Real  estate  developments  requiring  large-scale 
financial  operations  led  to  the  almost  complete  integration  of  the  three 
branches  of  the  industry — production,  distribution,  and  exhibition — 
in  the  hands  of  the  lafge  companies. 

By  the  early  twenties,  most  of  the  important  independent  corpora- 
tions and  individuals  were  eliminated  or  submerged.  The  industry 
had  already  passed  from  one  of  many  small  independent  companies 
to  one  controlled  by  a  few  relatively  powerful  organizations. 

At  this  time,  a  series  of  Hollywood  scandals  involving  motion 
picture  personalities  gave  impetus  to  militant  reform  groups  who  were 
already  sponsoring  Federal  censorship  of  the  movies  to  reduce  the 
production  of  salacious  pictures.  In  addition,  members  of  the  industry 
were  involved  in  constant  and  expensive  litigation.  The  large  com- 
panies, to  provide  means  for  adjusting  their  internal  disputes  without 
recourse  to  the  courts  and  to  combat  the  censorship  movement,  in 
1922  formed  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of 
America,  Inc. 

The  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  Inc., 
better  known  as  the  Hays  organization  from  the  political  figure 
employed  to  be  its  head,  is  an  illuminating  example  of  the  cooperation 
of  large  business  units  for  self-protection.  It  was  then,  and  it  is 
today,  supported  exclusively  by  the  large  companies.  It  was  con- 
ceived in  fear  of  regulation  of  the  industry  by  the  public  and  dedicated 
to  the  proposition  that  outsiders  should  never  dictate  its  policies. 

By  1927,  the  industry  was  launched  in  a  period  of  reckless  spending 
and  extravagance  which  would  have  meant  the  inevitable  wreck 
of  enterprises  in  more  settled  lines.  Of  necessity,  financial  depend- 
ence on  Wall  Street  increased  enormously. 

New  competition  centered  on  the  building  of  elaborate  theaters 
and  bidding  in  salaries  for  stars.  Admission  prices  rose  to  meet 
increased  costs.  At  the  same  time,  the  assembly-line  technique  was 
introduced  in  picture-making.  Poor-quality  pictures  became  fre- 
quent, and  the  industry  saw  a  sharp  decline  in  profits. 

The  sound  picture  saved  the  day.  Introduced  in  1926  by  Warner 
Bros.,  on  the  verge  of  bankruptcy,  this  innovation  received  instant 
approval  by  the  public-,  and  was  shortly  adopted  by  the  other  major 
companies. 

The  stock  market  crash  of  1929,  coming  on  the  heels  of  the  "talkies" 
boom,  played  havoc  with  some  parts  of  the  motion-picture  industry  as 
it  did  with  the  rest  of  the  Nation.  Strangely,  though,  box-office 
receipts  were  not  immediately  affected. 

Wall  Street  gazed  in  astonishment  at  what  appeared  to  be  a  "depression-proof" 
industry.  The  "resistance"  of  the  movie  to  the  stock-market  debacle  so  impressed 
Wall  Street  interests  that  during  the  following  years  they  were  to  struggle  with 
more  resolution  than  ever  to  gain  control  of  che  movie  industry.' 

«  Jacobs,  op,  cit.,  p.  300. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  7 

The  battle  for  control  of  sound,  started  before  the  crash,  now  came 
to  its  climax.  For  years,  various  groups  had  been  experimenting 
with  sound.  Warner  Bros,  developed  Vitaphone;  Fox  developed 
Movietone.  Through  alliances  with  Warner  and  Fox,  Electrical 
Research  Products,  Inc.  (E.  R.  P.  I.)'  gained  control  of  their  patents. 
The  Radio  Corporation  of  America  (R.  C.  A.)^  with  patent  rights  to 
Photophone  was  E.  R.  P.  I.'s  main  contender.  E.  R.  P.  I.  was 
successful  in  signing  long-term  agreements  for  the  use  of  sound 
equipment  with  five  of  the  large  producers  (M-G-M,  Paramount, 
United  Artists,  First  National,  and  Universal).  These  agreements 
were  so  successful  that  R.  C.  A.  was  virtually  eliminated  from  the 
field.®  Through  the  Radio-Keith-Orpheum  Co.  and  its  large  theater 
holdings,  R.  C.  A.  made  some  headway,  but  its  field  was  still  limited, 

R.  C.  A.  finally  filed  a  complaint  charging  unlawful  restraint  of 
trade  by  American  Telephone  &  Telegraph  and  its  affiliates.  In 
1935  a  peaceful  agreement  was  concluded  between  the  two  corpora- 
tions which  gave  R.  C.  A.  new  and  substantial  rights. 

The  entire  motion  picture  industry,  therefore,  through  patent  ownership  is 
indirectly  under  a  monopoly  control  far  beyond  the  early  aspirations  of  the 
Motion  Picture  Patents  Corporation.'" 

Despite  lowered  consumer  purchasing  power  due  to  the  depression, 
sound  was  at  first  successful  in  keeping  up  the  industry's  box  office 
receipts.  However,  the  installation  of  sound  equipment  in  both 
studios  and  theaters  was  a  heavy  financial  burden.  As  the  novelty 
of  sound  wore  off,  box  office  receipts  fell  drastically,  and  the  industry 
finally  felt  the  grip  of  the  depression.  The  big  theater  holdings  and 
real  estate  investments  of  the  motion  picture  companies  swiftly 
depreciated.  Most  of  the  large  companies  experienced  financial 
difficulties.  In  1933  Paramount  was  adjudicated  bankrupt;  R-K-0 
and  Universal  went  into  receivership;  the  Fox  Film  Corporation  was 
reorganized.  Many  of  the  theaters  which  had  been  acquired  during 
the  earlier  program  of  expansion  were  dropped.  From  1930  to  1935 
the  number  of  theaters  owned  by  the  major  companies  declined  from 
3,600  to  2,225." 

One  of  the  consequences  of  the  depression  was  the  enactment  in 
1933  of  the  National  Industrial  Recovery  Act.  This  law  required 
that  codes  of  fair  competition,  including  guarantees  of  minimum 
wages,  maximum  hours,  and  collective  bargaining  for  labor,  and 
provisions  restricting  unfair  trade  practices,  be  set  up  for  the  various 
industries.  The  motion  picture  industry  was  obliged  to  adjust  itself 
to  the  restrictions  of  a  code,  but  the  essential  framework  of  the 
industry  remained  unclianged. 

The  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry, 
approved  November  27,  1933,  provided  for  a  Code  Authority  to 
administer  the  code,  consisting  of  five  members  representing  the 
affiliated  interests,  five  representing  unaffiliated  interests,  three  repre- 

'  E.  R.  P.  I.  is  a  subsidiary  of  Western  Electric,  which  is  a  subsidiary  of  American  Telephone  &  Tele- 
graph, Morgan-controlled. 

>  Subsidiary  to  General  Electric,  Rockefeller-controlled. 

'  !Jhese  agreements  made  it  impossible  for  exhibitors  to  use  R.  C.  A.  sound  equipment  in  theaters  with 
E.  R.  P.  I.  equipment.  In  the  fall  of  1928.  90  percent  of  the  sound  pictures  produced  were  recorded  on 
E  R.  P.  I.  equipment.  By  the  end  of  1928  only  95  theaters  in  the  United  States  contained  non- Western 
Electric  reproducmg  apparatus,  while  1,046  theaters  had  installed  Western  Electric  equipment.  (A.  R. 
Daniehan,  A.  T.  A  T.,  The  Story  of  Industrial  Conquest.  Vanguard  Press,  New  York,  1939  pp.  145-149.) 

>o  Jacobs,  op.  cit.,  p.  421. 

1'  "Standard  Trade  and  Securities,"  published  by  Standard  Statistics  Company,  "Theaters  and  Motion 
Pictures,"  issue  of  February  20,  1935,  p.  TH-47. 


g  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

sentatives  of  the  Administration  without  vote,  and  labor  representa- 
tion when  labor  problems  were  to  be  considered.  Despite  this 
appearance  of  unbiased  character,  the  Code  Authority,  like  the 
industry,  was  dominated  by  the  affiliated  interests.  The  Darrow 
Board  report  said : 

It  was  indicated  that  of  the  10  members  of  the  Code  Authority,  5  represent- 
ing affiliated  producers,  distributors,  and  exhibitors,  and  5  representing  un- 
affiliated producers,  distributors,  and  exhibitors,  that  only  2  of  them  were  not 
connected  in  some  way  with  the  affiliated  producers,  distributors,  and  exhibitors 
and  could  thus  be  classed  as  really  independent. '^ 

To  insure  sympathetic  administration  of  the  code,  the  unusual  ex- 
pedient was  adopted  oi  naming  the  members  of  the  Code  Authority 
in  the  Code  itself.  In  only  two  other  Codes  of  Fair  Competition 
did  this  occur. 

The  same  control  was  seen  in  the  composition  of  the  31  local 
grievance  boards  and  31  local  clearance  and  zoning  boards  set  up 
under  the  code  to  adjudicate  motion  picture  disputes  of  a  local 
nature. 

They  are  dominated  by  the  distributors  and  first-run  exhibitors,  whose  in- 
terests are  the  same.  There  are  only  two  independent  subsequent-run  exhibitors 
provided  for  on  the  boards.  The  interests  of  distributors  and  first  run  theaters 
being  identical  as  opposed  to  subsequent-run  independent  theaters,  it  is  obvious 
that  *  *  *  the  voting  strength  of  the  boards  will  be  four  to  two  again.st  the 
independent  subsequent-run  exhibitors.!^ 

Control  of  the  industry  remained  undisturbed  by  the  code.  Never- 
theless, independent  exhibitors,  because  of  Government  intervention, 
received  under  the  code  a  number  of  concessions  from  the  affiliated 
interests  in  the  way  of  trade  practice  reforms.  Many  of  these  re- 
forms came  to  an  end  after  the  codes  were  declared  unconstitutional 
by  the  Supreme  Court  on  May  27,  1935. 

CRYSTALLIZATION    OF    THE    PATTERN 

The  period  of  hectic  growth  and  change  in  the  motion-picture  in- 
dustry is  over.  The  early  pioneering  days  have  given  way  to  a 
mature  and  stabilized  business  on  a  grand  scale.  The  bitter  com- 
petition of  yesterday  is  the  close  control  of  today. 

All  told,  there  are  in  the  United  States  about  110  producers,  nu- 
merous distributors  and  a  multitude  of  exhibitors.  Nevertheless,  the 
industry  is  dominated  by  5  major  companies,^*  all  of  which  are 
active  in  production,  distribution,  and  exhibition,  and  3  satellite 
companies,'^  interested  solely  in  production  and  distribution. 

The  production  scene  today  is  one  in  which  about  70  percent  of  all 
features  produced  in  this  coimtry  are  made  by  the  8  major  companies. 
Each  of  these  companies  produces  from  40  to  60  pictures  annuall}' 
with  the  exception  of  United  Artists  which  provides  distribution  fa- 
cilities for  a  group  of  individual  producers  who  all  together  make  20 
or  less. 


'2  Report  of  the  National  Recover^  Review  (Darrow)  Board  relating  to  the  Motion  Picture  Industry, 
Washington,  1934.  Composition  of  Authority:  Representing  affiliates,  M.  H.  Aylesworth,  president, 
R.  K.  O.;  S.  R.  Kent,  president,  Fox;  O.  .T.  Sehaefer,  vice-president,  Paramount;  N.  M.  Schenck,  presi- 
dent, Loew's;  H.  M.  Warner,  president.  Warner's.  Representing  unaffiliates.  R.  H.  Cochrane,  vice  presi- 
dent. Universal;  W.  R.  Johnston,  president.  Republic;  E.  Kuykendall,  president,  Motion  Picture  Theatre 
Owners  of  America  (including affiliated  and  unaffiliated  theater  owners);  C.  L.  O'Reilly,  president,  Theatre 
Owners  Chamber  of  Commerce,  N.  Y.;  and  N.  Yamins,  independent  exhibitor. 

"Ibid. 

"  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  Loew'j,  Inc.  (Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer),  Twentieth  Century-Fox  Film 
Corporation,  Warner  Brothers  Pictures,  Inc.,  and  Radio-Keith-Orpheum  Corporation. 

'5  Universal  Corporation,  Columbia  Pictures  Corporation,  and  United  Artists  Corporation. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 


9 


Table  1. —  Number  of  feature-length  motion  pictures  produced  in  the  United  Slates 
by  alt  producing  companies,  and  by  each  of  the  major  producing  companies,  by 
seasons,  1930-31  to  1938-39 


Season  > 

All 
com- 
panies 

Para- 
mount 

Loew's 

Twen- 
tieth 
Cen- 
tury- 
Fox 

Warner 

Radio- 
Keith- 

Or- 
pheum 

Colum- 
bia 

Univer- 
sal 

United 
Artists 

All 

other 
com- 
panies 

1030-31        

510 
490 
510 
480 
520 
517 
535 
450 
526 

58 
56 
51 
55 
44 
50 
41 
40 
58 

43 
40 
37 
44 
42 
43 
40 
41 
51 

48 
46 
41 
46 
40 
52 
52 
49 
56 

69 
56 
53 
63 
51 
58 
58 
52 
54 

32 
48 
45 
40 
40 
43 
39 
41 
49 

27 
31 
36 
44 
39 
36 
38 
39 
64 

22 
32 

28 
38 
39 
27 
40 
45 
•45 

13 
14 
.6 
20 
19 
17 
19 
16 
18 

198 

1931-32    

167 

1932-33               

203 

1933-34        - 

'30 

1934-35    

206 

1935-36           

191 

193&-37          

208 

1937-38  

127 

1938-39                

141 

'  Beginning  about  Sept.  1  each  year. 

Source:  United  States  v.  Paramount  Picture)^,  Inc.,  et  a!.,  Civil  Action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court  of 
the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov.  14 
1940. 

It  must  be  noted  that  the  percentage  given  above  vastly  under- 
states the  importance  of  the  major  companies  in  the  production 
branch  of  the  industry.  The  pictures  produced  by  these  companies 
include  practically  all  of  the  more  pretentious  films — those  with  pro- 
duction costs  of  $250,000  or  more  ^ach.  Features  produced  by  inde- 
pendent companies  consist  largely  of  "quickies,"  westerns  and  melo- 
dramas which  are  not  shown  in  first-class  theaters. 

The  control  by  the  large  companies  of  distribution  is  even  greater. 
Of  the  high-quality  features  which  yield  the  largest  box-office  returns, 
during  the  past  five  years — 

Fox,  Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0,  and  Warner  have  *  *  *  collectively 
released  about  80  percent  *  *  *  and  Columbia,  United  Artists,  and  Uni- 
versal *  *  *  about  15  percent  *  *  *. '  No  other  di.stributor  has  released 
more  than  1  percent  of  such  features  during  any  of  said  years  and  in  no  year  have 
all  other  distributors  combined  released  more  than  5  percent  of  such  features.'^ 

During  the  same  period  the  first-named  5  majors  collectively 
received  about  70  percent  and  the  other  3  about  25  percent  of  all  film 
rentals  in  the  United  States. 

Since  1930  the  major  companies — - 

have  continued  to  maintain  complete  control  of  the  distribution  of  such  features, 
although  many  of  them  have  been  produced  by  producers  not  employed  by  a 
major  company  but  pursuant  to  arrangements  made  preceding  the  production  of 
such  films  for  release  by  a  major  distributor.  Such  arrangements  generally 
included  the  use  of  equipment  owned  by,  or  production  talent  under  contract  to, 
one  or  more  of  the  defendants  [majors].  Thtse  arrangements  have  often  included 
financing  of  the  production  directly  by  the  major  distributor  involved  or  the 
borrowing  of  capital  by  the  producer  upon  its  showing  that  it  has  been  assured  of 
release  through  a  major  distributor.  Ordinarily,  no  funds  have  been  or  are 
available  for  this  type  of  production  in  the  absence  of  such  an  assurance." 

Independent  distributors,  therefore,  are  limited  to  handling  some 
foreign  importations  and  the  "quickie"  type  of  film  mentioned  above. 

Ownership  of  theaters  by  producer-distributors  has  already  been 
indicated  as  the  third  link  in  the  pattern  of  control.  Nevertheless, 
the  number  of  theaters  owned  today  by  producer-distributors  is  not 
large.  Of  a  total  of  17,000  theaters  in  operation,  the  majors  own 
or  control  about  2,800  theaters.     About  2,600  of  these  are  individually 

i»  U.  S.  V.  Paramount  Pkturen,  Inc.,  et  ah.  Civil  Action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court  of  the  United 
States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  Yorlc,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov.  14,  1940. 
"  Ibid. 


10 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 


owned  by  the  different  companies,  and  about  200  are  owned  jointly  by 
two  of  the  major  companies.^* 

Table  2. — Number  of  theaters  operated  by  each  of  the  major  companies,  1940  ■ 


Region  and  State 

Para- 
mount 

Loew's 

Twentieth 
Century- 
Fox 

Warner's 

Radio- 

Keith- 

Orpheum 

Total 

New  England: 

Maine           -'-  .  .- -  - 

39 
10 
8 
82 
3 
6 

26 
3 

72 

16 

8 

122 

16 
5 

42 

64 

1 

10 
20 
14 

39 

New  Hampshire 

10 

8 

5 

1 

10 

67 
3 
3 

10 
3 

16 

5 
2 

58 
16 

108 

& 

35 

49 

.     92 

195 

38 
3 
19 

51 

Middle  Atlantic:     . 

1 

201 

114 

Pennsylvania.  - 

270 

East  North  Central: 

Ohio    --  

21 

85 

14 

21 
6 
53 

3 

7 

165 

Michigan 

29' 

Wisconsin 

19 

77 

West  North  Central: 

Minnesota           -  - 

3 
6 

45 

6 
48 

76 

2 

51 

ID 

South  Dakota     

20 

10 
56 

1 

25 

56 

South  Atlantic: 

1 
3 
4 
2 

6 

8 
16 

9 
11 

1 

7 

1 

12 

District  of  Columbia 

1 

21 

Virginia 

17 
3 
69 
23 
38 
109 

11 
28 
33 
35 

47 

20 

6 

208 

28 

West  Virginia             ... 

3 

17 

North  Carolina 

70 

South  Carolina 

23 

Oeoreia                            ... 

1 

39 

Florida            .              .             .... 

..  .  . 

109 

East  South  Central: 

1 
2 

8 

1 

20 

31 

33 

Mississippi 

West  South  Central: 

35 

47 

Louisiana ^---  . 

1 

1 

23- 

14 

20 

Texas 

1 

209 

17 
9 
14 
36 

6 

7 

28 

13 

205 

17 

9 

18 

14 

9 

7 
8 
21 

1 

1 

47 

New  Mexico .  

13 

Arizona .., 

15 

Utah 

23 

Pacific: 

Washington 

3 
2 
12 

31 

15 

California 

4 

1 

4 

226 

Total- 

1,273 

122 

538 

557 

132 

2.622 

'  The  table  does  not  include  the  200  or  more  theaters  in  which  some  of  these  companies  have  a  joint 
interest. 

Source:  United  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  ef  al.,  civil  action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court 
of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov. 
14,  1940. 


'8  "Each  of  the  producer-exhibitors  *  •  *  is  jointly  interested  financially  in  one  or  more  theaters  with 
one  or  more  of  the  other  producer-exhibitors  •  *  *  through  profit  sharing  arrangements  with  respect  to 
particular  theaters;  through  so-called  pools  where  several  theaters  owned  or  controlled  by  two  or  more  are 
operated  as  a  unit;  through  direct  or  indirect  ownership  of  stock  in  a  single  theater  operating  corporation 
by  two  or  more  of  such  defendants;  or  through  arrangements  where  one  owns  or  leases  a  theater  and  the 
other  manages  it.  *  *  *  There  are  about  200  theaters  in  the  United  States  in  which  such  joint  interests 
are  held,  including  a  substantial  number  of  metropolitan  first -run  theaters.  In  addition  *  •  •  there 
are  numerous  other  joint  theater  interests  where  executive  employees,  or  managing  agents  of  one  producer- 
exhibitor  •  ♦  *  have  direct  or  indirect  stock  interests  in  a  "theater  operating  corporation  in  which 
another  producer-exhibitor    *    *    *    also  owns  a  direct  or  indirect  stock  interest."    (Ibid.) 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 


11 


While  these  theaters  represent  but  16  percent  of  all  theaters  in 
operation,  they  take  on  added  significance  when  it  is  noted  that 
more  than  80  percent  of  all  metropolitan  first-run  theaters  '^  are 
affiliated;  in  23  key  cities  all  of  the  first-nm  theaters  are  affiliated 
(table  3)';  out  of  92  cities  with  population  over  100,000  the  majors 
control  exhibition  in  73  cities  (table  4);  in  these  same  73  cities  the 
majors  "operate  enough  first-nni  theaters  in  each  to  receive  a  sub- 
stantial majority  of  the  total  film  revenue  supplied  by  each  of  these 
cities";  there  are  283  cities  with  populations  between  25,000  and 
100,000  in  200  of  which  the  majors  operate  one  or  more  theaters; 
"by  control  of  first-run  theaters  alone,  affiliated  exhibitors  have  been 
able  to  secure  as  much  as  two-thirds  of  the  total  theater  admissions 
paid  in  cities  as  large  as  250,000";  and  the  affiliates  control  exhibition 
in  all  United  States  cities  with  populations  of  more  than  1,000,000.^*^ 

Table  ^.—Number  of  first-run  metro'politajt  theaters  operated  by  each  of  the  major 
companies  in  35  key  cities,  19^0 


City 


Albany.  NT.  Y.i 

Atlanta,  Ga.. 

Baltimore,  Md 

Boston,  Mass.' 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.' 

Charlotte,  N.  C. 

Chicago,  111.1 

Cincinnati,  Ohio  > 

Cleveland,  Ohio  ' 

Dallas,  Tex.i_ 

Denver,  Colo 

Des  Moines,  Iowa  ' 

Detroit,  Mich 

Houston,  Tex.' 

Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Kansas  City,  Mo.' 

Los  Angeles,  Calif. 

Memphis,  Tenn.' 

Milwaukee,  Wis.' 

Minneapolis,  Minn.'... 

Newark,  N.  J.' 

New  Haven,  Conn.' 

New  Orleans,  La.' 

New  York  City 

Oklahoma  City,  Okla.'. 

Omaha,  Nebr.' 

Philadelphia,  Pa.' 

Pittsburgh,  Pa 

Portland,  Oreg 

Salt  Lake  City,  Utah'. 

St.  Louis,  Mo 

St.  Paul,  Minn.' 

San  Francisco,  Calif 

Seattle,  Wash 

Washington,  D.  C 


Total. 


Para- 
mount 


63 


Loew's 


Twen- 
tieth 
Century- 
Fo.x 


Warner 
Bros. 


Radio- 

Keith- 

Orpheum 


35 


29 


'  In  cities  thus  marked,  all  first-run  theaters  are  operated  by  these  companies. 

Source:  United  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  et  al.,  civil  action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court  of 
the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of  N'ew  York,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov.  14, 
1940. 


"  A  metropolitan  theater  is  one  located  in  a  key  city.  A  key  city  is  one  of  such  size  and  strategic  location 
that  the  first-run  exhibition  of  a  motion  picture  therein  effectively  advertises  the  film  among  exhibitors 
and  the  public  in  a  wide  surrounding  area;  31  such  cities  constitute  the  main  distributing  centers  of  the 
major  companies.  A  first-run  theater  is  one  which  exhibits  flrst-class  features  released  by  one  or  more  of 
the  majorsonaflrst-run  showing  in  the  city  or  town  in  which  it  is  located.  An  affiliated  theater  is  one  which 
is  either  owned  or  controlled  by  1  of  the  5  major  producer-distributor-exhibitor  companies. 

2»  United  States  v.  Paramount,  1940. 


12 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 


Table  4. — Cities  with  populations  of  100,000  or  more  in  which  exhibition  is  controlled 

by  major  companies 


City 


Popula- 
tion 
rank  ' 


Controlled  by- 


New  York,  N.  Y 

Chicago,  111 

Phila-ielphia,  Pa 

Detroit,  Mich 

Los  Angeles,  Calif 

Cleveland,  Ohio 

Boston,  Mass -.. 

Pittsburgh,  Pa 

Washington,  D.  C 

San  Francisco,  Calif.. 

Milwaukee,  Wis 

Buffalo,  N.  Y 

New  Orleans,  La 

Minneapolis,  Minn... 

Cincinnati,  Ohio 

Newark,  N.  J 

Kansas  City,  Mo 

Houston,  Tex ' 

Seattle,  Wash 

Rochester,  N.  Y. 

Denver,  Colo 

Portland,  Oreg 

Columbus,  Ohio 

Oakland,  Calif 

Atlanta,  Ga 

Jersey  City,  N.  J 

Dallas,  Tex 

Memphis,  Tenn 

St.  Paul,  Minn 

Birmingham,  Ala 

San  Antonio,  Tex 

Omaha,  Nehr 

Dayton,  Ohio 

Syracuse,  N.  Y 

Oklahoma  City,  Okla 

San  Diego,  Calif _ 

Worcester,  Mass 

Richmond,  Va . 

Fort  Worth,  Tex 

Jacksonville,  Fla 

Miami,  Fla. 

Youngstown,  Ohio... 

Hartford,  Conn __ 

Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 

Long  Beach,  Calif 

New  Haven,  Conn... 

Des  Moines,  Iowa 

Flint.  Mich 

Salt  Lake  City,  Utah. 

Springfield,  Mass 

Bridgeport,  Conn 
Norfolk,  Va..   .. 

Yonkers,  N.  Y 

Scranton,  Pa 

Paterson,  N.  J 

Albany,  Isi.  Y 

Chattanooga,  Tenn.  . 

Trenton,  N.J 

Spokane,  Wash 

Camden,  N.  J . 

Erie,  Pa 

Wichita,  Kans 

Knoxville,  Tenn 

Wilmington,  Del 

Reading,  Pa 

Tampa,  Fla 

Sacramento,  Calif 

Peoria,  111 

South  Bend,  Ind 

Lowell.  Mass ... 

Utica,  N.  Y 

Charlotte,  N.  0 

Duluth,  Minn 


Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Paramount,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Fox,  Paramount,  Warner. 

Fox,  Paramount. 

Fox,  Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Loew's,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Loew's,  Warner. 

Loew's,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Fox,  Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Fox,  Warner. 

Loew's,  Paramount. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Jl-K-0. 

Paramount,  R-K-0. 

R-K-0. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Fox,  Loew's,  Paramount. 

Loew's,  Paramount. 

Fox. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Fox,  Loew's,  R-K-0. 

Fox. 

Loew's,  R-K-0. 

Fox. 

Loew's,  Paramount. 

Loew's,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Paramount. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Warner. 

Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Paramount. 

Paramount,  Warner. 

Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Loew's,  R-K-0. 

Loew's,  R-K-0,  Warner. 

Paramount,  Warner. 

Fox. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Warner. 

Loew's. 

Paramount. 

Do. 

Do. 
Warner. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Warner. 
Pararoount,  R-K-0. 
Fox. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Warner. 
Paramount,  R-K-0. 

Do. 
Paramount. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  Warner. 
Loew's,  Warner. 
Loew's. 

Loew's,  Paramount,  R-K-0. 
Paramount. 
Paramount,  Warner. 
R-K-0,  Warner. 
Paramount. 
R-K-0. 
Fox. 
Warner. 

Do. 
Fox. 

Paramount. 
Loew's,  Warner. 

Do. 
Paramount. 
Fox. 
Paramount. 

Do. 
Paramount,  R-K-0. 
Warner. 
Paramount. 

Do. 


'  All  population  figures  are  taken  from  1940  census. 

Source:  Lniled  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  et  at.,  civil  action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court 
of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov.  14, 
1940. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  EfCONOMIC  POWER 


13 


More  important  than  the  percontago  of  theaters  owned  is  the  seat- 
ing capaeity  represented  therein,  estimated  at  about  25  percent  of  the 
total  seating  capacity  in  the  United  States.  This  situation  is  illus- 
trated by  a  tabulation  of  theaters  and  seating  capacity  in  three  large 
cities — Philadelphia,  Chicago,  and  Milwaukee — and  the  State  of 
Florida.  Moreover,  these  seats  in  larger  and  better  houses  represent 
an  even  larger  proportion  of  potential  box-office  returns,  since  admis- 
sion prices  in  these  more  important  theaters  are  usually  considerably 
higher  than  in  other  theaters,  and  they  operate  a  greater  number  of 
hours  per  week  than  the  smaller  houses. 


Table  5.- 


-Control  of  exhibition  facilities  by  a  single  major  company  in  each  of  4 
'  localities,  1939 


Philadelphia,  Pa 

Warner  Bros.  Circuit  Management  Corporation 
C h icago,  111 

Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation  ' 

Milwaukee,  Wis , .  _  _ 

Fox  Wisconsin  circuit .-_ 

State  of  Florida 

Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.' 


Theaters  > 


Num- 
ber 


203 
58 

309 
38 
66 
15 

214 

■  68 


Percent 
of  total 


100.0 

28.6 
100.0 

12.3 
100.0 

22.7 
100.0 

31.8 


Seats 


Num- 
ber 


203,  616 
85, 019 

328,  379 
84,919 
72, 186 
18,  550 

122,  172 
54,  534 


Percent 
of  total 


100.0 

41.8 
100.0 

25.9 
100.0 

25.7 
100.0 

44.6 


Average 
number 
of  seats 

per 
theater 


1,003 
1,466 
1,063 
2,235 
1,094 
1,237 
571 
802 


'  Those  theaters  are  excluded  which  were  closed  or  for  which  seating  capacity  was  not  given. 

2  Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation  is  97  percent  controlled  by  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc. 

3  Includes  only  theaters  operated  by  E.  J.  Sparks  and  S.  A.  Lynch.    Paramount  operates  approximately 
40  additional  theaters  in  Florida. 

Source:  Compiled  from  data  in  the  1940  Film  Daily  Yearbook. 


Thus  integration  in  the  motion  picture  industry  is  complete,  from 
the  inception  of  an  idea  for  a  picture  through  to  the  actual  exliibition 
of  the  film.  The  importance  of  the  integration  of  production,  dis- 
tribution, and  exhibition  lies  in  the  accomplishment,  not  of  more 
closely  knit  operation  but  of  virtual  elimination  of  competition. 

In  the  production  field,  competition  between  the  major  companies 
has  been  minimized  since  1930  by  the  device  of  loaning  talent. 

The  major  producers  have  preferred  to  loan  and  exchange  the  highest  priced 
technical  and  artistic  talent  which  they  may  have  under  exciu.sive  contract  to  and 
with  each  other  on  standardized  terms  rather  than  drive  the  price  of  such  talent 
higher  by  competing  for  the  privilege  of  placing  it  under  contract  in  the  first 
instance. 2' 

These  same  privileges  have  not  been  accorded  independent  pro- 
ducers. 

Even  where  such  talent  has  been  made  available  to  independent  producers,  the 
terms  have  frequently  been  discriminatory  as  compared  to  the  terms  upon  which 
it  has  been  made  available  to  major  producers. 22 

21  Ibid. 
« Ibid. 


14  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

Table  6. — Number  of  loans  by  major  companies  since  1933 


Major  company 

To  major 
producers 

To  inde- 
pendent 
producers 

Major  companj' 

To  major 
producers 

To  inde- 
pendent 
producers 

610 
439 
223 
109 

56 
46 
12 
12 

Fox        - -._  . 

251 
175 
198 

7 

Paramount. 

Columbia 

Universal _ .._ 

36 
11 

R-K-0 

•  Loans  of  stars,  feature  players,  directors,  writers,  camermen,  or  other  production  talent  under  contract 
to  one  major  producer  made  to  another  producer. 

Source:  U.  S.  v.  Paramount  Picturis,  Inc.,  et  al.,  civil  action  No.  87-273,  in  the  District  Court  of  the 
United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York,  amended  and  supplemental  complaint,  Nov.  14, 1940. 

Cooperation  between  the  big  producers  is  not  limited  to  exchange 
of  talent.  Through  the  Association  of  Motion  Picture  Producers, 
Inc.  (see  appendix  2),  which  operates  the  Call  Bureau  and  Central 
Casting  Corporation,  the  majors  in  effect  have  established  a  common 
personnel  department  to  provide  themselves  with  extra  and  bit 
players  below  the  contract  grade.  These  services  are  not  extended 
to  non-members. 

Production  of  pictures  by  independents  is  impeded  by  lack  of  good 
distribution  facilities.  To  obtain  loans  from  banks  in  order  to  start 
production,  the  independents  must  be  assured  good  distribution. 

If  the  producer  ha.s  a  good  distributing  contract  *  *  *  and  that  picture 
is  distributed  through  a  reputable  distributing  company  that  knows  how  to  sell 
the  picture,  I  might  loan  as  high  as  the  entire  cost  of  production.  I  do  not  do 
that  always,  but  if  there  is  a  good  distributing  contract  in  a  good  distributing 
organization     *     *     *     j  Yvill  not  hesitate  to  loan  the  entire  cost  of  production.^^ 

A  pretentious  film,  in  order  to  be  profitable,  must  be  shown  in  at 
least  some  of  the  better-class  theaters  controlled  by  the  major  com- 
panies. The  only  way  an  independent  producer  can  insure  this  is 
through  a  distribution  contract  with  one  of  the  major  companies. 

It  is  difficult  to  believe  that  capital  will  readily  enter  a  field  of  business  where 
conditional  requirements  exist,  if  aware  in  advance  of  restrictions  which  either 
partiall}^  or  entirely  close  the  market  to  the  products  of  the  projected  undertaking. 2* 

Independent  production  and  distribution  of  a  first-class  feature  is 
thus  indeed  rare.  In  fact,  "more  than  95  percent  of  the  features 
exhibited  in  metropolitan  first-run  theaters  are  released  by"  the  major 
companies.^^ 

In  the  beginning,  when  the  major  companies  were  acquiring  theaters 
at  a  rapid  pace,  these  companies  frequently  found  themselves  in 
competition  in  the  exhibition  field.  Here,  as  elsewhere,  it  was  decided 
that  cooperation  is  more  profitable  than  competition.  Each  com- 
pany acquired  and  relinquished  interests  in  theaters,  but  in  time  there 
was  a  tendency  for  one  company  to  emerge  as  the  dominant  element 
in  a  particular  geographical  area. 

The  affiliated  companies  have  each  retamed  well-scattered  interests 
in  large  prior-run  theaters  in  metropolitan  locations,  but  have  tended 
less  and  less  to  compete  in  the  operation  of  the  smaller  or  subsequent- 
run  theaters.  In  some  cases  affiliated  companies  have  withdrawn  in 
favor  of  the  dominant  element.     In  other  cases  conflicting  interests 

"  "Story  of  the  Films,"  edited  by  Joseph  P.  Kennedy,  A.  W.  Shaw  Co.,  Chicago  and  New  York,  1927, 
p.  87.  Discussion  by  Dr.  Attilio  H.  Giannini,  then  president.  Bowery  &  East  River  National  Bank, 
formerly  president  of  United  Artists. 

"  W.  H.  S.  Stevens,  "Unfair  Competition,"  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1917,  p.  76. 

2»  United  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  1940. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  15 

have  been  resolved  by  joint  operation  agreements  whereby  one 
company  assumes  the  responsibility  of  operation  but  both  share  in 
the  profits.  Gradually,  the  major  companies  have  acquired  rather 
separate  and  distinct  areas  or  spheres  of  control. 

Paramount,  operating  more  than  1,200  theaters,  has  the  largest 
exhibition  holdings  among  the  major  companies.  About  half  of 
Paramount's  theaters  are  located  in  the  South.  In  that  broad  area 
comprising  the  States  of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Georgia, 
Florida,  Tennessee,  Alabama,  Mississippi,  Arkansas,  Louisiana,  and 
Texas  the  other  major  companies  operate  but  a  handful  of  theaters, 
and  virtually  every  one  of  these  is  a  large  first-run  theater  in  a  key 
city.  A  similar  pattern  is  found  in  North  Dakota,  South  Dakota, 
Minnesota,  Iowa,  eastern  Nebraska,  northern  Illinois,  and  Utah. 
Paramount  is  the  sole  affiliated  exhibitor  in  the  New  England  States 
of  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  and  Vermont,  and  it  operates  an  important 
number  of  theaters  in  Massachusetts.  Important  groups  of  Para- 
mount theaters  are  also  found  in  Pennsylvania,  Virginia,  Indiana, 
Ohio,  and  Colorado. 

Fox  has  well  over  500  theaters.  These  are  primarily  located  in  the 
Pacific  and  Mountain  States  of  California,  Oregon,  Washington, 
Montana,  Wyoming,  and  Colorado,  and  in  this  area  there  are  rela- 
tively few  other  affiliated  theaters.  Also,  in  the  Middle  West,  Fox  is 
the  sole  affiliated  exhibitor  in  Kansas  and  western  Nebraska  and  has 
the  major  share  in  Missouri  and  Wisconsin. 

Warner's  operates  more  than  500  theaters.  These  are  located 
principally  in  the  Atlantic  Coast  States  with  the  largest  holdings  in 
Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey,  New  York,  and  Connecticut.  It  has  an 
appreciable  number  of  theaters  in  Massachusetts,  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Maryland,  Delaware,  and  the  Virginias.  Warner's  also 
has  important  exhibition  interests  in  Ohio,  Illinois,  Wisconsin, 
Oklahoma,  and  Kentucky. 

R-K-0  has  over  100  theaters,  more  than  half  of  which  are  in  New 
York  and  New  Jersey.  It  has  an  appreciable  number  in  Ohio  and 
Michigan  and  about  30  in  10  other  States. 

Loew's  operates  the  smallest  number  of  theaters  of  any  of  the 
majors— 120-130.  More  than  half  of  these  theaters  are  in  New  York 
City.  There  is  also  an  appreciable  number  of  Loew  theaters  in  Con- 
necticut and  Ohio.  The  remainder  are  scattered  throughout  the 
country  and  are  among  the  best  first-run  theaters  in  large  cities. ^^ 

A  description  of  the  theater  holdings  of  the  major  companies  in 
such  broad  terms  does  not  indicate  clearly  just  how  neatly  the  exhi- 
bition interests  of  these  companies  are  segregated.  This  is  best  seen 
when  the  theater  holdings  of  the  major  companies  are  mapped  ac- 
cording to  their  exact  locations.  If  this  be  done,  it  is  seen  that  although 
both  Paramount  and  Warner's  have  important  exhibition  interests  in 
the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  the  theaters  of  each  company  are  so  located 
as  not  to  compete  with  one  another.  Warner's  theaters  are  located 
in  the  western  part  of  the  State  around  Pittsburgh  and  in  the  south- 
eastern corner  centering  in  Philadelphia.  Most  of  the  Paramount 
theaters,  on  the  other  hand,  are  in  the  northeast  section  of  the  State, 
in  the  Scranton  and  Wilkes-Barre  area,  with  a  few  theaters  clustered 
together  on  the  extreme  west  border  of  the  State. 

28  Loew's  has  always  pursued  a  very  conservative  policy  regarding  theater  acquisitions.  "Outside  of 
New  York,  home  of  the  big  Loew  neighborhood  chain,  there  are  only  five  Loew  theaters  that  are  not  first- 
run."    (Fortune,  vol.  XX,  No.  2,  August  1939.) 


IQ  CONCENTRATION  OF  E'CONOMIC  POWER 

Warner's  theater  Loldings  in  the  neighborhood  of  Philadelphia 
extend  into  the  northern  tip  of  Delaware  and  across  the  Susquehanna 
River  into  Camden  and  southern  New  Jersey.  Warner's  also  operates 
a  number  of  theaters  in  northern  New  Jersey.  The  center  of  the 
State,  however,  is  dominated  by  K-K-0  which  has  about  15  theaters  in 
the  neighborhood  of  Trenton. 

Loew's  and  R-K-0  both  have  important  chains  of  neighborhood 
theaters  in  New  York  City.  Neither  of  these  companies,  however, 
has  extended  its  holdings  into  the  New  York  counties  immediately  to 
the  North.  These  are  dominated  by  Paramount.  Further  upstate 
the  picture  again  changes,  and  there  are  groups  of  R-K-O  and  Warner 
theaters.  Paramount  theaters  again  appear  in  pooled  operation  with 
Loew  in  Buffalo  and  with  R-K-O  in  Rochester. 

Nor  does  the  above  indicate  the  number  of  situations  in  which  two  of 
the  major  companies  jointly  operate  theaters.  In  addition  to  the  more 
than  2,600  theaters  which  are  individually  operated  by  one  of  the 
majors,  there  are,  as  previously  mentioned,  more  than  200  others 
operated  jointly  through  pooling  agreements.  Each  one  of  the  major 
companies  has  a  joint  operation  agreement  for  at  least  one  theater 
with  at  least  one  of  the  other  affiliated  companies.  A  most  important 
instance  of  such  operation  is  in  Michigan.  In  the  peninsula  area, 
outside  the  city  of  Detroit,  Paramount  and  R-K-O  are  jointly  inter- 
ested in  the  operation  of  over  100  theaters.  These  theaters  represent 
practically  the  entire  affiliated  theater  interests  in  this  area.^^ 

This  division  of  the  exhibition  branch  of  the  industry  into  separate 
areas  of  control  has  not  only  eliminated  competition  in  exhibition 
between  the  major  companies,  but  also  has  made  each  major  company 
the  dominant  element  in  every  territory  in  which  it  operates,  even 
where  opposed  by  powerful  independent  interests.  Acting  as  an 
exhibitor,  each  of  the  companies  is  able  to  count  upon  the  goodwill 
of  the  other  companies  in  meeting  independent  competition  since  it  is 
expected  that  preferential  treatment  will  be  reciprocated  in  areas 
where  these  other  companies  act  as  exhibitors. 

The  granting  of  certain  terms  and  privileges  with  respect  to  the  exhibition 
of  one  producer-exhibitor's  *  *  *  films  in  another  producer-exhibitor's 
*  *  *  circuit  is  necessarily  conditioned  upon  the  granting  of  similar  terms  and 
privileges  by  the  latter  with  respect  to  the  exhibition  of  its  films  in  the  circuit  of 
the  former.^* 

Competition  in  the  motion  picture  industry  today  is  far  different 
than  when  the  industry  was  composed  of  a  great  many  small  units. 
At  the  present  time  there  is  competition  between  the  large  producer- 
distributor-exhibitor  units,  but  it  is  limited.  The  problem  of  securing 
name  actors,  actresses,  and  directors  is  to  some  extent  solved  by 
mutual  loaning  of  personnel.  The  producers  have  eliminated  the 
problem  of  marketing  motion  pictures  by  taking  over  into  their  own 
control  the  most  important  theaters  in  the  country — those  from  which 
the  major  share  of  revenue  comes.  In  general,  competition  between 
the  exhibition  units  of  the  largo  companies  has  been  avoided  by  a 
division  of  the  exhibition  field  into  separate  spheres  of  influence. 

In  lieu  of  competition  between  the  leaders  of  the  industry,  there  is 
in  many  respects  a  very  definite  cooperation.     This  is  illustrated  by 

"  Ibid,  and  The  Film  Daily  Yearbook,  1940. 
"  United  States  v.  Paramount, -1940. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  jy 

the  Hays  organization,  the  avowed  purpose  of  which  is  self-govern- 
ment of  the  industry.  Through  the  many  divisions  and  services  of 
this  organization,  the  major  producer-distrihutor-exhibitors  engage  in 
many  common  activities,  and  present  a  united  front  against  any 
influence  which  would  tend  to  change  the  status  quo.      (See  appendix 

The  state  of  competition  in  the  industry  is  epitomized  in  the 
utterance  of  Spyros  Skouras,  executive  of  one  of  the  affihated  exhibi- 
tion companies  and  himself  owner  of  a  large  theater  chain.  After 
urging  an  increase  of  admission  prices  to  a  minimum  of  50  cents  in 
all  principal  key  cities,  he  added: 

For  we  are  no  longer  fighting  each  other,  nor  is  there  any  longer  such  a  thing 
as  competition,  but  a  question  of  establishing  solidarity  or  perishing.'^ 

2»  Film  Daily,  June  7,  1940. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  ISSUES 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  ISSUES 

Wlien  a  few  dominating  elenients  finally  achieve  substantial  control 
of  an  industry,  they  usually  proceed  to  adopt  and  perfect  methods 
which  will  insure  retention  of  that  control.  Such  methods  commonly 
lead  to  protests  of  unfair  advantage,  not  only  from  smaller  elements 
within  the  industry,  but  in  some  cases  from  consumers  as  well.  It  is 
not  siu-prising  that,  as  in  most  instances  where  conflicts  of  interest 
arise,  a  slogan  summarizing  the  grievances  of  these  parties  usually 
appears.  In  industrial  warfare,  the  rallying  cry  frequently  becomes 
the  name  of  some  trade  practice. 

Every  industry,  as  a  normal  consequence  to  the  conditions  under 
wliich  it  operates,  develops  its  own  peculiar  trade  practices.  How- 
ever, frequent  attacks  on  a  practice  do  not  constitute  proof  that  it  is 
in  itself  vicious.  Instead,  the  diflficulty  usually  lies  in  the  way  the 
trade  practice  is  employed.  A  practice,  which  under  other  circum- 
stances might  be  wholly  innocent,  may  provide  a  perfect  instrument 
of  control  when  used  as  a  tool  in  the  hands  of  a  dominating  element 
within  an  industry. 

The  motion  picture  industry  has  perhaps  developed  more  than  its 
share  of  odd  trade  practices.  Many  of  these  arise  from  the  unusual 
circumstance  that  the  industry  operates  basically  under  the  copyright 
laws  rather  than  the  laws  of  purchase  and  sale.  In  most  industries 
the  manufacturer  (producer)  sells  his  product  to  a  wholesaler  (dis- 
tributor) who  in  turn  sells  it  to  a  retailer  (exhibitor),  and  the  retailer 
finally  places  the  product  in  the  hands  of  the  consumer.  Title  to 
the  product  in  such  circumstances  has  thus  changed  hands  several 
times  during  the  transit  of  the  goods  from  the  manufacturer  to  the 
consumer. 

In  the  motion  picture  industry,  on  the  other  hand,  the  producer 
makes  a  negative  film  from  which  are  reproduced  a  number  of  positive 
prints.  The  film  is  protected  by  copyright,  and  both  this  copyright 
and  title  to  the  actual  films  seldom  change  hands.  Since  the  producer 
and  distributor  are  usually  a  part  of  the  same  company,  it  is  immaterial 
which  holds  the  actual  title.  The  film  is  rented  to  the  exhibitor  who  is 
simultaneously  licensed  under  the  copyright  privilege  to  exhibit  the 
film  to  the  public.  No  physical  exchange  of  goods  for  money  takes 
place  between  the  exhibitor  and  the  consumer.  The  film  is  shown, 
and  the  print  is  returned  to  the  distributor  who  ships  it  on  to  another 
exhibitor.  Each  film  is  thus  used  many  times,  crossing  and  recrossing 
State  lines  as  it  is  leased  and  shipped  to  one  exhibitor  after  another. 

Since  actual  title  is  never  acquired  by  the  exhibitor,  the  distributor 
is  able  under  the  copyright  laws  to  exercise  control  over  the  use  of  the 
print  by  the  exhibitor.  He  is  able  to  determine  at  what  time  and  to 
a  large  extent  under  what  conditions  the  exhibitor  shall  show  the 
pictures  to  his  audiences.     This  contrasts  with  the  retailer  in  most 

286782— 41— No.  43 3  *  21 


22  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

lines  of  enterprise  who  is  generally  less  restricted  in  the  disposition  of 
his  product. 

Another  unusual  circumstance  in  the  motion  picture  industry  is  the- 
perishableness  of  the  product  handled.  The  necessity  or  desirability 
of  showing  a  picture  to  the  public  while  it  is  still  new  makes  freshness- 
or  priority  in  vending  the  product  to  the  public  a  most  important 
factor. 

Thus,  it  is  found  that  most  of  the  unusual  trade  practices  of  th& 
industry,  and  coincidentally  most  of  its  controversies,  arise  either 
from  the  special  legal  privileges  accorded  a  copyright  holder  or  from 
the  efforts  to  show  the  product  while  it  is  still  new. 

The  principal  objective  of  the  industry  is,  of  course,  to  show  films 
to  the  consumer,  and  this  takes  place  through  the  medium  of  the 
exhibitor.  Naturally,  therefore,  it  is  the  exhibitor — the  Unk  between 
the  producer-distributor  and  the  consumer^ — who  is  involved  in  most 
of  the  controversies  of  the  industry. 

Each  exhibitor  has  two  important  relationships  with  other  elements 
in  the  industry.  One  concerns  his  contact  with  the  distributors  from 
whom  he  must  secure  supplies  of  film.  The  other  affects  the  exhibitors- 
with  whom  he  is  in  competition  for  a  supply  of  film  and  for  priority 
of  showing. 

Looking  first  at  the  distributors,  we  find  that  virtually  all  first- 
quality  feature  films  produced  in  the  United  States  are  distributed 
through  eight  companies.  Thus,  where  the  supply  of  films  is  con- 
cerned, the  exhibitor  faces  a  high  degree  of  concentration. 

With  respect  to  relations  between  exhibitors,  it  is  found  that  most 
theaters  are  operated  singly  or  in  groups  of  two  or  three.  In  other 
cases,  however,  a  great  many  theaters  may  be  tied  together  under 
common  management  and  control  to  form  a  single  large  chain  exhibi- 
tion organization.  The  number  of  theaters  acting  together  as  a. 
single  bargaining  unit  in  this  way  may  run  into  the  hundreds.  The 
small  exhibitor  is  thus  frequently  in  competition  with  a  large  and 
financially  powerful  organization,  which  perhaps  is  still  further  rein- 
forced by  affiliation  with  one  of  the  major  producer-distributors. 

Claims  of  unfair  business  tactics  are  most  usually  advanced  by  the 
smaller  elements  within  an  industry.  The  very  size  of  the  larger 
units  gives  them  power,  and  this  power  is  their  protection.  The 
controversies  usually  involve  claims  by  the  smaller  elements  that  the 
larger  organizations  misuse  the  power  granted  them  by  their  size  to 
stifle  or  eliminate  competition. 

Accordingly,  most  of  the  controversies  of  the  motion  picture  in- 
dustry may  be  divided  into  two  general  classes.  One  class  includes 
those  practices  which,  according  to  small  exhibitors,  are  used  by  the 
large  distributor  organizations  to  maximize  their  profits  at  the  expense 
of  the  exhibitors  and  the  public.  In  this  category  may  be  placed 
block  booking,  blind  selling,  forcing  of  short  subjects,  and  designating 
of  play  dates.  The  other  class  comprises  those  practices  which  small 
exhibitors  contend  have  been  used  by  large  exhibitor  organizations  to 
drive  them  out  of  business  or  place  them  in  subordinate  competitive 
positions.  Under  this  heading  are  such  practices  as  overbuying,, 
setting  of  admission  prices,  and  clearance  and  zoning. 

Of  course,  not  all  aspects  of  these  practices  may  be  so  neatly  divided 
into  two  such  general  classes.  Since  the  five  largest  companies  in  the 
industry  act  not  only  as  the  most  important  producers  and  distributors 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  23 

of  motion  pictures  but  also  as  the  operators  of  a  large  number  of  the 
best  and  most  profitable  theaters  in  the  United  States,  these  categories 
to  some  extent  merge.  Nevertheless,  the  distinction  is  useful  in 
analyzing  the  problems  and  controversies  of  the  industry. 

BLOCK  BOOKING,  BLIND  SELLING,  AND  THE  FORCING  OF  SHORT  SUBJECTS 

Block  booking. — This  practice  has  been  defined  as  the  simultaneous 
sale  by  a  distributor  to  an  exhibitor  of  a  number  of  motion  pictures  for 
release  and  delivery  over  a  period  of  time.  The  pictures  are  offered 
in  a  group,  and  the  aggregate  price  is  in  part  determined  by  the 
quantity  taken. 

A  distinction  is  sometimes  made  between  block  booking  as  such  and 
compulsory  block  booking.  In  the  latter  case,  an  exhibitor  is  offered 
the  entire  group  of  films  handled  by  a  distributor  during  a  single  season. 
He  is  required  to  purchase  the  entire  block  under  some  designated 
terms  or  is  given  to  understand  that  he  will  be  unable  to  license  any. 
In  some  cases,  while  the  pictures  may  not  be  offered  on  an  "all  or 
none"  basis,  the  price  of  pictures  selected  individually  may  be  placed 
so  high  as  to  make  purchase  of  anything  less  than  the  entire  block  not 
feasible. 

Perhaps  more  than  any  other  trade  practice  of  the  motion  picture 
industry,  block  booking  has  been  brought  before  the  public  and  de- 
bated as  an  evil  or  a  blessing.  It  has  been  attacked  by  independent 
exliibitors,  by  independent  producers,  by  the  Federal  Trade  Commis- 
sion, and  by  consumer  groups.  It  has  been  discussed  in  legislatures 
and  reviewed  in  the  courts. 

The  most  persistent  attacks  on  block  booking  have  come  from  inde- 
pendent exhibitors.  In  the  first  place,  each  of  the  major  producer- 
distributors  (excepting  United  Artists,  which  distributes  a  smaller 
number  of  high-quality  films)  makes  and  attempts  to  seU  from  40  to 
60  or  more  feature  pictures  each  year.  The  exhibitor,  depending  on 
his  pohcy  with  respect  to  changes  of  program  and  double  features, 
may  use  during  a  single  year  as  many  as  several  hundred  features. 

Ideally,  the  exhibitor  would  prefer  to  select  from  the  offerings  of 
each  distributor  those  pictures  he  considers  most  in  keeping  with  his 
exhibiiion  requirements.  Where  compulsory  block  booking  is  exer- 
cised, however,  this  is  not  possible.  The  exhibitor  finds  it  necessary 
to  contract  for  the  entire  output  of  several  distributors,  regardless  of 
the  quality  or  desirability  of  the  individual  pictures  making  up  each 
block.  In  this  way,  independent  exhibitors  are  effectively  prevented 
from  developing  individuality  for  their  theaters,  based  on  their  per- 
sonal tastes  and  knowledge  of  their  audiences. 

Further,  because  of  the  necessity  of  contracting  for  films  in  large 
blocks,  exhibitors  on  some  occasions  are  compelled  to  contract  for 
more  pictures  than  they  can  profitably  show.  It  is  important  to  note 
that  once  a  contract  has  been  executed,  it  is  economically  necessary 
for  the  exhibitor  to  show  the  films,  since  whether  they  are  shown  or 
not,  he  must  pay  for  them. 

Contracts  between  distributors  and  exhibitors  usually  contain  the 
following  stipulation  under  the  heading  "Liquidated  Damages": 

If  the  Exhibitor  shall  fail  or  refuse  to  exhibit  during  the  term  hereof,  any  of 
said  motion  pictures,  the  Exhibitor  shall  pay  as  liquidated  damages  a  sum  equaJ 


24  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

to  the  fixed  sum  or  sums  herein  specified  as  the  rental  for  each  such  motion 
pioture     *     *     *.' 

In  addition,  fh.e  complete  preemption  of  playing  time  after  a  few 
block  purchases-  nave  been  made  limits  the  ability  of  the  exhibitor  to 
contract  for  desirable  films  of  other  producers  should  they  be  made 
available  to  him.  It  is  important  to  point  out  that  exhibitors  do  not 
object  to  block  booking  as  such,  since  assurance  of  a  continuous  supply 
of  film  is  an  important  consideration.  Rather,  it  is  the  compulsory 
nature  of  the  practice  which  they  oppose. 

The  independent  exhibitors  have  been  supported  in  their  opposition 
by  religious,  civic,  and  public  welfare  groups.  These  groups  oppose 
block  booking  because  it  interferes  with  community  selection,  or  local 
cJ^nsorship  activities.  It  is  the  experience  of  these  groups  that  an 
fei<thibitor  will  meet  their  objections  to  the  showing  of  an  unsuitable 
film  with  the  statement  that  he  is  economically  obliged  to  play  it  since 
\i6  must  pay  for  it,  or  alternatively  that  failure  to  show  it  might  involve 
him  in  a  breach  of  contract  action. 

The  practice  is  attacked  by  independent  producers  who,  in  trying 
to  sell  their  product  to  independent  exhibitors,  find  playing  time 
preempted  by  block  pm'chases,  leaving  little  or  no  screen  time  for 
their  product.  This  same  reason  tends  to  discourage  the  entry  of  new 
t)l:*oducers  into  the  industry.^ 

On  the  other  side,  block  bookmg  has  been  defended  by  the  affiliated 
producer-distributors  as  a  method  of  wholesaling  which  reduces  their 
distribution  costs.  Further,  they  allege  that  the  definite  income 
assured  them  by  the  practice  enables  them  to  make  better  pictures 
than  they  could  otherwise. 

The  present  interest  is  not  in  the  claims  of  these  conflicting  industry 
■gltyups;  rather  it  is  in  determining  whether  the  practice  adversely  or 
beneficially  affects  the  public. 

The  consumer  usually  patronizes  the  theater  convenient  to  him. 
Gteographically,  therefore,  he  is  limited  in  his  choice  of  pictures.  If 
the  theater  is  under  block-booking  contracts  which  prevent  the 
proprietor  from  selecting  pictures  he  feels  are  suitable  for  his  audience 
or  which  require  him  to  show  inferior  pictures,  the  interests  of  the 
d6iisumer  are  not  served. 

The  system  assures  an  income  on  many  pictures  which  can  by  no 
standard  be  called  excellent.  The  economic  reason  for  the  curtail- 
ment of  low-quality  productions  is  thus  weakened.  It  may  be 
assumed  that  a  system  of  free  licensing  would  give  additional  impetus 
to  the  production  of  higher-quality  pictures. 

It  is  alleged  that  block  booking  is  used  as  one  of  the  devices  of 
control  whereby  competition  between  producers  in  the  licensing  of 
lectures  is  to  sonie  extent  lessened.  Such  competition  as  exists  at 
present  is,  for  the  most  part,  confined  to  a  brief  selling  season  in  the 
late  summer  or  early  fall  of  each  year.  Year-round  competitive  sales 
efforts  and  the  fluctuating  market  prices  that  are  thus  implied  are  not 
found  in  this  industry.  Moreover  the  sale  of  pictures  in  large  blocks 
obviates  a  good  deal  of  the  price  competition  between  pictures  which 
might  take  place  were  each  film's  probable  box-oifice  attractiveness  to 
be  weighed  against  its  asking  price.     It  may  be  assumed  that  under  a 

'  Hearings  before  the  Committee  on  Interstate  and  Foreign  Commerce,  House  of  Representatives,  pur- 
suant to  S.  280,  76th  Congress,  third  session,  "Motion-Picture  Films,"  Part  I,  Paramount  Exhibition  Con- 
tract, p.  230. 

'  Ibid.    See  testimony  of  I.  E.  Chadwick,  pp.  344-368. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  25 

system  where  each  picture  would  have  to  stand  on  its  individual 
merits,  there  would  be  greater  price  competition  in  film  rentals. 

The  preemption  of  industry  playing  time  by  large  block  purchases 
to  a  large  extent  hmits  the  market  for  new  independent  producers. 
However,  it  must  be  pointed  out  that  the  control  of  the  more  im- 
portant exhibition  outlets  by  the  producer-distributors  is  probably  a 
more  important  factor  in  limiting  the  entrance  of  new  producers  of 
quality  pictures  into  the  market  than  is  block  booking. 

If  the  producer  contention  that  block  booking  is  an  economical 
method  of  distribution  which  reduces  distribution  costs  is. valid,  this 
is  to  the  advantage  of  the  consumer.  Jt  is  unquestionably  true  that 
sale  of  pictures  in  smaller  groups  than  the  total  offered  by  a  distrib- 
utor during  a  single  season  would  entail  greater  sales  expense.  How- 
ever, distribution  costs  in  to  to  are  relatively  small,  and  sales  expense 
is  but  a  fraction  of  distribution  cost.^  The  savings  in  sales  expense 
achieved  by  block  booking  may  thus  represent  a  doubtful  economy 
for  the  consumer  if  the  system  entails  even  minor  disadvantages  of 
other  types. 

Likewise,  it  is  advantageous  to  the  consumer,  if,  as  producers  con- 
tend, assured  income  permits  the  production  of  better  pictures.  It 
might  be  argued  that  conspicuous  success  in  this  direction  has  not 
yet  been  achieved,  although  block  booking  has  been  in  effect  for 
more  than  20  years.  Moreover,  the  large  box-office  returns  from 
some  pictures  produced  on  small  budgets,  compared  with  occasional 
expensive  box-office  failures,  indicates  that  success  in  satisfying  the 
consumer  is  not  wholly  to  be  measured  in  terms  of  income  available 
for  production.*  To  the  contrary,  there  is  strong  reason  to  believe 
that  a  more  competitive  system  of  sales  would  tend  to  discourage  the 
production  of  poor  pictures,  in  contrast  to  the  present  system  which 
insures  a  return  on  even  the  least  satisfactory  films  of  the  major 
producers. 

A  weighing  of  these  pros  and  cons  leads  to  the  conclusion  that  block 
booking  as  practiced  today  is,  on  the  whole,  disadvantageous  to  the 
consumer.     It  is  necessary,  however,  to  examine  the  alternatives. 

The  most  frequent  proposal  has  been  that  contpulsory  block  booking 
be  completely  eliminated.  In  practically  every  Congress  in  the  last 
15  years  bills  to  that  effect  have  been  introduced,*  but  none  has 
passed  both  Houses.  The  latest  of  these  was.  the  Neely  bill,  which 
states  in  section  3: 

It  shall  be  unlawful  for  any  distributor  of  motion-picture  films  in  commerce  to 
lease  or  offer  to  lease  for  public  exhibition  filiijs  in  a;  block  oT  group  of  two  or  more 
films  at  a  designated  lump-sum  price  for;  th«  entire  block  or  group  only  and  to 
require  the  exhibitor  to  lease  all  such  films  ol-  permit  him  to  lease  none;  or  to  lease 
or  offer  to  lease  for  public  exhibition  films  in  a  block  or  group  of  two  or  more  at  a 
designated  lump-sum  price  for  the  entire  block  or  group  and  at  separate  and 
several  prices  for  separate  and  severgil  films,  or  for  a  number  or  numbers  thereof 
less  than  the  total  number,  which  total  or  lump-sum  price  and  separate  and 
several  prices  shall  bear  to  each  such  relation  (a)  as  to  operate  as  an  unreasonable 

3  According  to  the  industry,  distribution  costs  amou  nt  to  10  percent  of  the  motion-picture  dollar.  ("Film 
Facts,"  published  by  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  Inc.,  New  York,  1940.) 
Recent  data  are  not  avaUable,  but  in  1929  motion  picture  distributors  alBliated  with  producers  reported 
total  expenses  of  $31,700,000.  Of  this  amount  $9,^)0,000  was  accounted  for  by  salaries  and  exper>ses  of 
salesmen.  (U.  S.  Dept.  of  Commerce,  Census  of  Distribution  ,1929.)  In  this  year,  then,  direct  sales  ex- 
pense amounted  to  less  than  ons-third  of  total  distribution  expenses.  There  is  no  repson  to  assume  that 
the  proportion  has  materially  artered  since  that  time. 

*  For  example,  "The  Great  McGinty"  and  "It  Happened  One  Night,"  produced  on  relatively  small 
budgets,  were  financial  successes,  while  "Marco  Polo,"  produced  on  a  lavish  scale,  was  a  failure. 

»  Among  them  are:  3. 1667,70th  Cong.,  1st  sess.;  S.  3012,  H.  R.  4757,  H.  R.  8877,  and  H.  R.6472,  74th  Cong., 
2d  sess.;  S.  280,  76th  Coijg.,  3d  sess. 


2g  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

restraint  upon  the  freedom  of  an  exhibitor  to  select  and  lease  for  use  and  exhibition 
only  such  film  or  films  of  such  block  or  group  as  he  may  desire  and  prefer  to  procure 
for  exhibition,  or  (6)  as  tends  to  require  an  exhibitor  to  lease  such  entire  block  or 
group  or  forego  the  lease  of  any  number  or  numbers  thereof,  or  (c)  that  the  effect 
of  the  lease  or  offer  to  lease  of  such  films  may  be  substantially  to  lessen  competition 
or  tend  to  create  a  monopoly  in  the  production,  distribution,  and  exhibition  of 
films;  or  to  lease  or  offer  to  lease  for  public  exhibition  films  in  any  other  manner  or 
by  any  other  means  the  effect  of  which  would  be  to  defeat  the  purpose  of  this  Act.* 

The  major  difficulty  which  such  a  provision  would  face  in  practice 
is  that  the  magnitude  of  the  price  differential  which  would  constitute 
an  unreasonable  restraint  upon  an  exhibitor's  choice  of  pictures  or 
which  would  substantially  lessen  competition  is  not  explicitly  defined. 
The  interpretation  of  the  provision  would  thus  be  left  to  the  courts. 
A  variety  of  judgments  not  necessarily  in  consonance  with  each  other 
might  well  arise,  and  there  is  little  doubt  that  both  the  industry  and 
the  already  crowded  courts  would  be  plunged  into  a  new  period  of 
extensive  and  costly  litigation. 

The  Federal  Trade  Commission  in  1927  attempted  to  outlaw  the 
practice  by  issuing  a  "cease  and  desist"  order  against  Famous  Players- 
Lasky  Corporation  ^  in  which  it  declared  that  block  booking  was  an 
unfair  and  improper  practice.  The  ruling  was  later  reversed  by  the 
Federal  courts.^  Trade  practice  hearings  conducted  by  the  Federal 
Trade  Commission  in  1927  resulted  in  little  change  as  the  Commission 
was  unable  to  secure  agreement  between  all  factions  in  the  industry. 

Another  alternative  to  block  booking  which  has  been  proposed  is 
the  cancelation  privilege.  It  has  been  suggested  that  many  of  the 
disadvantages  of  block  booking  would  be  eliminated  if  the  exhibitor 
were  given  the  privilege  of  canceling  a  stated  proportion  of  all  films 
bought  in  groups  without  having  to  make  payment  therefor.  One 
of  the  early  proposals  of  this  type  was  the  "5-5-5"  clause,  so  called 
because  under  it  exhibitors  were  permitted  to  cancel  5  percent  with- 
out payment,  5  percent  with  half  payment,  and  5  percent  with  full 
payment  (but  with  extended  playing  time  on  other  features)  of  all 
pictures  bought  in  block,  provided  the  block  included  all  features 
released  by  the  distributor  during  a  season.  This  clause  was  drawn 
up  as  a  result  of  meetings  between  distributors  and  exhibitors  during 
1928  and  1930;  it  was  not,  however,  extensively  adopted.  It  was 
superseded  in  1933  by  a  10  percent  cancelation  clause  incorporated  in 
the  Code  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry  set  up  under  the  National 
Recovery  Administration.^ 

Under  the  Code  provisions,  exhibitors  were  given  the  privilege  of 
canceling  without  payment  up  to  10  percent  of  all  films  bought  in 
blocks.  Exercise  of  the  cancelation  privilege  was,  however,  hemmed 
about  with  many  restrictions  which,  according  to  exhibitor  testimony 
before  the  Darrow  Board  and  House  and  Senate  hearings,  made  the 
privilege  of  little  value  to  them.^°  Some  form  of  cancelation  clause 
has  remained  in  the  licensing  agreements  of  many  of  the  companies 
since  the  N.  R.  A.  codes  were  invalidated.  The  following  illustrates 
the  type  of  provision  usually  found  at  the  present  time. 

*  *  *  If  the  total  number  of  feature  motion  pictures  offered  to  the  Exhibitor 
by  the  Distributor,  at  one  time,  shaU  have  been  licensed  by  the  Distributor  here- 

•  S.  280,  77th  Conp.,  1st  sess. 

'  Federal  Trade  Commission.  Docket  No.  835,  July  9, 1927. 

'  Federal  Trade  Commission  v.  Paramount  Famous-Lasky  Corporation,  Adolph  Zukor,  and  Jesse  L.  Lasky, 
In  the  United  .States  Circuit  Court  of  Appeals  for  the  Second  Circuit,  April  4, 1932. 

•  National  Recovery  Administration,  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry,  article 
V-F,  Part  6,  of  the  approved  Code,  1933. 

"  See  National  Recovery  Administration,  Work  Materials,  No.  34,  1936,  pp.  93-96. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  27 

'Under,  the  Exhibitor  shall  have  the  right  to  exclude  from  this  license  not  to  exceed 
ten  (10%)  percent  of  the  total  number  of  feature  motion  pictures  so  licensed 
hereunder  provided  the  Exhibitor  shall  give  to  the  Distributor  written  notice  of 
the  Exhibitor's  election  to  exclude  any  of  said  motion  pictures  within  ten  (10) 
days  after  the  mailing  by  the  Distributor  of  notice  of  availability  thereof.  Upon 
the  exclusion  of  each  feature  motion  picture  the  licenvse  therefor  and  all  rights 
thereunder  shall  terminate  and  shall  revert  to  the  Distributor." 

The  intent  of  such  a  clause  is  that  exhibitors  have  the  right  to  a 
10-percent  cancelation  of  undesirable  pictures  if  certain  conditions 
are  adhered  to:  They  must  contract  for  the  whole  block  offered;  they 
must  not  be  in  default  of  their  contract  (any  default  making  them 
liable  for  the  amount  involved  in  those  pictures  already  canceled); 
they  must  give  the  distributor  notice  of  cancelation  in  the  time 
specified;  they  must  have  paid  for  nine  pictures  before  canceling  one 
(the  cancelation  privilege  being  cumulative). 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  insertion  by  distributors  of  a  can- 
celation clause  in  film  contracts  has  been  largely  a  political  gesture. 
The  clause  has  permitted  producer-distributors  to  contend  at  the 
repeated  Congressional  hearings  on  block  booking  that  they  have 
taken  steps  to  correct  any  abuses  with  which  the  practice  might  be 
charged — that  they  have,  in  fact,  been  more  liberal  in  their  treatment 
'of  exhibitors  under  block  contracts  than  strictly  necessary. 

It  may  be  noted,  in  the  first  place,  that  cancelation  does  not  cost  the 
industry  any  playing  time.  The  screen  time  allotted  a  canceled  pic- 
ture must  be  filled  by  some  other  attraction.  But  beyond  this,  ex- 
hibitors have  repeatedly  alleged  at  House  and  Senate  hearings  on  block 
booking  that  such  cancelation  privileges  as  have  been  voluntarily 
extended  to  them  by  distributors  have  by  various  means  been  rendered 
wholly  ineffective. 

One  method  of  circumvention  considered  particularly  obnoxious 
has  been  that  of  reallocation.  Pictures  are  customarily  classified 
according  to  quality,  and  become  known  as  "A"  pictures,  "B"  pic- 
tures, and  so  on.  The  classification  is  subject  to  the  control  of  the 
distributor,  and  the  rental  asked  for  a  film  is  made  according  to  the 
class  allocation.  At  the  time  he  executes  a  block  contract,  an  ex- 
hibitor may  know  only  that  he  has  contracted  for  a  specified  number 
of  A,  B,  and  C  pictures.  After  he  makes  known  his  intention  to 
cancel  a  particular  film,  he  may  find  that  it  is  reallocated  to  the  lowest 
price  group  while  some  other  film  in  a  lower  class  has  increased  in  price. 

In  one  case  cited,  an  exhibitor  canceled  a  picture  in  the  A  class 
because  the  women  in  his  community  did  not  want  it  shown.  This 
picture,  originally  allocated,  at  $138,  was  reallocated  at  $23  in  the 
lowest  bracket.  Another  picture,  eighteenth  in  quality  and  showing 
bad  box  office  returns  was  then  reallocated  to  this  exhibitor  at  $138 
in  place  of  the  cancelation.^^ 

An  exhibitor,  after  canceling  a -poor  picture,  may  be  told  that  the 
print  of  a  desirable  attraction  is  unavailable;  it  may  be  intimated  that 
the  print  will  later  become  available  if  the  cancelation  is  withdrawn. 

To  avoid  promiscuous  use  of  the  cancelation  privilege  and  to  hurry 
the  playing  of  undesirable  films,  use  has  been  made  of  the  "stop" 
picture.  The  "stop"  picture  is  any  attraction  which  has  been  shown 
successfully  in  the  first-run  houses  and  is  much  in  demand  among 
theatergoers.     It   is    employed    by    distributors    primarily    to    force 

"  Hearings.  House  of  Representatives,  pursuant  to  S.  280,  p.  433. 
"  Ibid,  p.  428,  also  contracts  showing  renllocaticn  on  pp.  439-440. 


2g  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

exhibitors  to  "fulfill  their  contractual  obligations"  (that  is,  to  send, 
immediately  a  check  for  any  film  rentals  which  may  be  due),  but  it  is 
also  used  to  induce  exhibitors  to  play  undesired  films. 

I  screened  The  Tower  of  London  and  because  of  the  horror  it  contained,  I 
deemed  the  picture  unfit  to  show  at  the  Lyric  Theater  *  *  *  j^  thereupon,, 
called  the  Universal  naanager  *  *  *  and  attempted  to  cancel  it  out.  He 
assured  me  I  would  mak,e  a  lot  of  money  and  I  had  better  play  the  picture. 
I,  however,  still  did  not  wish  to  play  it  and  so  I  wrote  him  *  *  *  attempting 
to  cancel. 

That  letter  *  *  *  yt^m  gjve  you  a  summary  and  story  of  his  reaction  to  my 
attempts  to  cancel.  Finally,  I  had  to  pay  for  the  picture  in  order  to  get  Destry 
Rides  Again,  and  not  play  it.  I  did  this  and  still  have  not  played  the  picture, 
nor  do  I  intend  to  play  it.'^ 

It  has  also  been  alleged  that  distributors  can  easily  circumvent  a 
cancelation  privilege  by  including  with  releases  a  few  definitely  unsat- 
isfactory and  cheap  pictures,  knowing  that  the  privilege  will  be  used 
up  on  these  films. 

The  significance  of  the  cancelation  privilege  as  a  remedy  to  block 
booking  is  succinctly  stated  by  Nathan  Yamins,  a  leading  independent 
exhibitor. 

*  *  *  the  cancelation  privilege  offers  no  remedy  to  the  evils  of  block  booking. 
These  provisions  still  enable  the  producer-distributor  to  maintain  their  monopoly 
on  the  screen,  it  still  enables  the  distributor  to  pass  on  his  mistakes  to  the  exhib- 
itor, and  with  the  exception  of  the  top  group  pictures  offers  no  inducement  for 
improvement  in  quality. 

It  is  a  temporary  provision  offered  and  will  endure  only  where  the  industry  is 
faced  with  legislation  and  litigation,  and  as  practiced  now  is  so  hemmed  in  with- 
numerous  restrictions  as  to  be  worthless." 

An  additional  alternative  to  straight  block  booking  is  contained  in 
the  recent  consent  decree  signed  by  the  five  affiliated  companies.  It 
is  agreed  in  the  decree  that  these  companies,  for  a  limited  period  after 
August  31,  1941,  will  sell  their  features  in  groups  of  not  more  than 
five  each,  and  the  purchase  of  any  one  group  will  not  be  made  contin- 
gent on  the  purchase  of  any  other  group.  Provision  is  also  made  for 
the  cancelation  of  any  feature  considered  offensive  on  "moral,  religious 
or  racial  grounds."  The  consent  decree  is  discussed  in  full  in  appendix 
III. 

It  may  be  mentioned  that  the  affiliated  companies  in  buying  each 
other's  pictures  are  not,  on  the  whole,  troubled  by  the  compulsory 
"aspects  of  block  booking.  Instead,  these  companies  usually  negotiate 
selective  contracts  with  each  other.  Under  this  system  a  company 
may  contract  for  all  the  pictures  distributed  by  another  company,  but 
retain  the  option  of  accepting  for  use  only  those  which  are  later  con- 
sidered desirable.  Continuity  of  film  supply — a  very  desirable  fea- 
ture— is  thus  assured.  At  the  same  time,  the  affiliated  companies 
acting  as  exhibitors  assume  no  obligation  to  show  films  which  after  a 
preview  are  considered  unsatisfactory.^^ 

Forcing  of  short  subjects. ^Another  aspect  of  block  booking,  though 
it  is  usually  treated  as  a  separate  practice,  is  the  forcing  of  short 
subjects — news  reels,  comedies,  travelogues,  etc.  Short  subjects  are 
presumably  used  to  complement  features  in  filling  out  a  program. 
Exhibitors  allege  that  not  only  must  tjiey  in  many  cases  contract  for 

"Ibid.,  pp.  407-408.    Letters  on  pp.  408-409.    A  similar  case  on  pp.  261-265. 

'*  Ibid.,  Testimony  Nathan  Yamins,  p.  441. 

'«  The  selective  contract  not  only  substitutes  for  block  booking  so  far  as  the  affiliated  exhibitor  iseoneemed; 
it  also  has  certain  unsatisfactory  connotations  in  connection  with  the  delay  of  play  dates  in  independent^ 
theaters.    This  side  of  the  question  will  be  discussed  in  a  later  section. 


OONCKNTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  29 

•all  the  feature  pictures  offered  by  a  single  company  in  order  to  secure 
-any;  they  must  in  addition  agree  to  pay  for  and  show  all  short  sub- 
jects released  by  the  same  company. 

Forcing  of  shorts  is  vigorously  attacked  by  independent  exhibitors. 
They  contend  that  shorts  are  dated  to  theaters  without  regard  to 
their  suitability  with  the  features  shown.  Moreover,  as  a  consequence 
•  of  having  to  book  with  several  distributors,  exhibitors  contend  that 
they  are  frequently  obliged  to  book  a  greater  number  of  shorts  than 
they  require  to  round  out  their  programs.  In  some  cases,  this  results 
in  several  news  reels  being  shown  simultaneously.  Even  if  short 
suljijects  are  not  shown,  the  exhibitor  must  pay  for  them.  Failure  to 
pay  for  shorts  may  result  in  the  shutting  off  of  all  film  supplies. 

For  example,  in  one  of  Paramount's  short-feature  exhibition  con- 
tracts 85  short  subjects,  exclusive  of  news  reels,  are  offered. 

Beginning  with  the  first  play  date  thereof  *  *  *  but  subject  to  the  avail- 
abihty  of  the  respective  one  reel  motion  pictures  licensed  hereunder,  the  Exhibitor 
agrees  to  exhibit  seven  (7)  one  reel  motion  pictures  each  month,  until  the  com- 
pletion of  the  exhibition  thereof.  The  total  license  fees  payable  for  the  one  reel 
motion  pictures  licensed  hereunder  is  the  sum  of  $255. .50,  which  total  sum  the 
Exhibitor  agrees  to  pay  in  51  consecutive  weekly  installments.  *  *  *  It  is 
agreed  that  the  Distributor  may  at  its  option  deliver  to  the  Exhibitor  c.  o.  d.  any 
motion  picture  deliverable  hereunder,  and  may  add  to  said  c.  o.  d.  the  amount  of 
any  past  due  indebtedness  owing  under  this  or  any  other  agreement  by  the 
"Exhibitor  to  the  Distributor. '« 

Independent  producers  oppose  the  forcing  of  short  subjects  for 
practically  the  same  reasons  they  oppose  block  booking.  The  prin- 
cipal objection  is  that  the  market  is  closed  to  them  through  preemption 
of  playing  time. 

The  practice  is  defended  by  the  producer-distributors  on  the  grounds 
that  it  eliminates  waste  in  selling  expense  and  that  the  common  sale 
of  shorts  and  features  results  in  savings  to  exhibitors.  They  also 
claim  that  from  their  background  of  experience  they  are  at  least  in 
some  cases  better  able  to  judge  what  constitutes  a  well-balanced 
motion  picture  program.  It  is  sometimes  contended  that  the  prac- 
tice was  born  from  the  desire  to  provide  appropriate  shorts  to  com- 
plement the  showing  of  their  features,  thereby  encouraging  greater 
theater  attendance. 

An  additional  reason  why  the  practice  is  favored  by  the  producer- 
distributors  is  one  less  frequently  advanced  by  them.  The  short 
subject  in  some  cases  provides  a  try-out  for  talent  which  may  prove 
suitable  at  some  later  period  for  use  in  feature  pictures.  Stock 
short  subjects  also  constitute  a  relatively  inexpensive  training  ground 
for  directors  and  technicians.  The  cost  of  these  beginners'  efforts  is 
then  at  least  partly  defrayed  by  booking  the  shorts  into  independent 
theaters. 

It  may  be  pointed. out  that  in  the  operation  of  their  own  theaters  the 
affiliated  companies  have  in  general  worked  out  mutually  satisfactory 
arrangements  providing  for  selection  of  short  subjects.  This  parallels 
the  selective  contract  arrangement  with  respect  to  features. 

To  the  consumer  the  exact  suitability  of  short  subject  material  for 
use  with  particular  feature  pictures  is  probably  not  of  great  moment. 
It  does  appear,  however,  that  the  exhibitor,  in  direct  contact  with  his 
audiences,  should  be  in  a  better  position  to  judge  this  factor.  The 
consumer  is  not  indifferent,  however,  to  the  contention  that  mor^ 
shorts  than  are  necessary  may  be  forced  on  the  exhibitor,     if  more 

w  Hearings,  House  of  Hepresentatives,  on  S.  28o,  p.  249. 


3Q  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

are  booked  than  shown,  the  consumer  is  required  to  pay  for  something 
he  does  not  get,  since  his  purchase  of  tickets  must  support  the  process. 
The  alternative  is  sometimes  no  more  desirable.  The  consumer  who 
goes  to  the  theater  to  see  a  certain  feature  and  then  sits  through  a 
number  of  shorts  and  several  dated  news  reels  is  pardonably  bored  or 
irritated.  It  may  also  be  pointed  out  that  some  of  the  shorts  which 
reach  the  screen  do  not  tend  to  make  the  consumer  appreciate  the 
advantages  of  using  these  one-  and  two-reel  subjects  for  try-outs  and 
training. 

Forcing  of  shorts,  when  accompanied  by  block  booking,  is  equivalent 
to  full-line  forcing.  Orders  of  the  Federal  Trade  Commission, 
enforced  by  the  courts,  have  held  full-line  forcing  to  be  an  unfair 
trade  practice.  In  the  1927  trade  practice  conferences  conducted  by 
the  Federal  Trade  Commission  it  was  agreed  that  shorts  should  not 
be  forced.  However,  no  change  in  industry  practice  followed  these 
conferences,  either  because  of  the  Commission's  inability  to  enforce 
its  rulings,  or  because  of  difficulty  in  proving  the  compulsory  nature 
of  the  practice. 

Another  effort  to  eliminate  me  practice  was  made  under  the  N.  R.  A. 
Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  industry: 

No  Distributor  shall  require  as  a  condition  of  entering  into  a  contract  for  the 
licensing  of  the  exhibition  of  feature  motion  pictures  that  the  Exhibitor  contract 
also  for  the  licensing  of  the  exhibition  of  a  greater  number  of  short  subjects 
(excepting  newsreels),  in  proportion  to  the  total  number  of  short  subjects  required 
by  such  Exhibitor,  than  the  proportion  of  the  feature  pictures  for  which  a  contract 
is  negotiated  bears  to  the  total  number  of  feature  pictures  required  by  the  ex- 
hibitor.'^ 

This  provision  was  criticized  as  making  possible  the  forcing  of 
shorts  to  the  full  extent  of  an  exhibitor's  playing  time.     Moreover — 

Distributors  evaded  the  provision  by  supplying  short  subjects  on  a  weekly 
program  basis,  charging  the  exhibitor  a  sum  equal  to  an  average  of  the  payments 
made  during  the  previous  year.  In  effect  the  exhibitor  paid  an  amount  equal  to 
his  previous  year's  cost,  even  though  the  number  of  shorts  might  have  been 
decreased.'* 

Another  weakness  of  the  provision,  that  of  excepting  news  reels, 
was  pointed  out  by  the  Independent  Theatre  Owners  Association,  Inc., 
of  New  York. 

The  provision  does  not  more  than  recognize  the  existence  of  an  evil  and  in 
no  way  remedies  the  same.  In  the  first  place,  it  exempts  newsreels  from  the 
operation  of  the  provision  and  practice  has  shown  many  exhibitors  over-stccked 
in  newsreels,  having  been  forced  to  purchase  four  or  five  newsreels  from  different 
companies.  With  respect  to  this  type  of  short,  the  evil  is  even  greater,  since  only 
one  company's  reels  can  be  used  under  any  circimistance,  as  they  usually  cover 
the  same  important  news  points." 

Under  the  recent  consent  decree,  the  five  affiliated  companies  have 
agreed  to  abandon  short  subject  forcing  during  the  period  the  decree 
is  in  effect  (see  Appendix  III). 

Blind  selling. — A  trade  practice  which  has  raised  much  hue  and  cry 
in  recent  years  is  blind  selling  (or  blind  buying).  It  is  part  and 
parcel  of  the  block  booking  system. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  selling  season,  exhibitors  are  showered  with 
glittering  prospectuses  from  the  several  motion  picture  companies. 
These  point  in  glowing  terms  to  last  season's  successes  and  foretell 

"  National  Recovery  Administration,  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry,  art. 
V-D,  Part  5. 

'•National  Recovery  .Administration,  Work  Materials  No.  34,  1936,  p.  100. 

'•  Hearings  before  Senate  Finance  Committee,  Investigation  of  National  Recovery  Administration, 
74th  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  pursuant  to  S.  Res.  79,  p.  1320. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  31 

the  even  greater  achievements  to  come.  The  exhibition  contract, 
however,  contains  only  what  is  known  as  a  schedule  of  contract.  A 
few  pictures  which  have  been  completed  or  are  nearly  complete  may 
be  listed  on  this  schedule.  Several  may  be  described  as  containing 
some  particular  star  or  featured  player.  The  stories  from  which 
several  others  are  to  be  made  niay  be  given.  However,  many  of  the 
pictures  and  in  some  cases  all  of  them  may  be  designated  only  by  a 
number  and  a  note  as  to  the  price  class  m  which  they  are  to  fall.  In 
accepting  the  contract  for  the  block  of  pictures,  the  exhibitor  in 
general  knows  no  more  than  that  he  will  get  a  certain  number  of 
pictures  and  that  these  pictures  will  fall  in  certain  price  classifications. 
Following  the  schedule  of  contract  is  a  paragraph  which  illustrates 
how  blind  selling  is  effected. 

It  is  expressly  understood  and  agreed  that  the  Distributor  does  not  license 
hereunder  to  the  exhibitor  any  particular  motion  picture  but  only  those  motion 
pictures  are  licensed  hereunder  which  shall  be  generally  released  by  the  Distributor 
as  provided  in  the  schedule  above;  that  the  announcement  book,  work  sheet,  press 
sheet,  or  any  other  announ'cement  issued  by  the  Distributor  is  issued  for  the  pur- 
pose only  of  indicating  what  the  Distributor  plans  to  produce  and  does  not  con- 
stitute any  warranty  or  representation  that  the  motion  pictures  therein  referred 
to  or  described  will  be  generally  released  during  the  period  provided  in  the 
Schedule. 20 

As  indicated  above,  then,  a  few  pictures  are  highlighted,  some 
idea  of  the  plots,  names  of  stars,  directors,  or  other  attractive  points 
being  mentioned.  On  the  whole,  however,  this  is  limited  to  a  few 
top  pictures.  Then  a  disclaimer  is  included  which  relieves  the  dis- 
tributor from  the  necessity  of  complying  with  his  statements.  It 
follows  that  the  exliibitors  must  buy  largely  upon  the  reputation  and 
past  performance  of  a  particular  distributor's  product.  In  effect, 
insofar  as  the  independent  exhibitors  are  concerned,  it  can  be  cate- 
gorically stated  that  this  is  the  only  industry  in  which  the  buyer, 
having  no  idea  of  what  he  is  buying,  underwri^^es  blindly  all  the 
product  offered  him. 

The  objections  of  independent  exhibitors  to  blind  selling  are  similar 
to  their  objections  to  block  booking.  The  necessity  of  buying  pictures 
sight  unseen  prevents  the  exhibitor  from  selecting  out  of  all  those 
features  eventually  released  the  particular  ones  he  might  consider  to 
be  most  suitable  for  showing  in  his  theater.  As  has  been  previously 
indicated,  affiliated  theaters  have  solved  the  problem  through  the 
device  of  the  selective  contract. 

It  is  understandable  that  in  selling  films  under  the  present  system 
the  actual  productions  sometimes  fail  to  measure  up  to  pre-season 
announcements.  From  this  factor  have  arisen  many  complaints  by 
independent  exhibitors  against  distributors. 

Blind  selling  has  consistently  been  opposed  by  organizations  inter- 
ested in  improving  the  moral  standards  of  film  entertainment.  These 
groups  have  found  that  blind  selling,  combined  with  block  booking, 
has  prevented  them  from  bringing  pressure  on  the  local  exhibitor  to 
permit  some  form  of  community  selection  of  pictures. 

The  consumer  standpoint  on  blind  selling  parallels  that  of  the  inde- 
pendent exhibitor.  Any  limitations  on  the  ability  of  an  exhibitor  to 
license  and  show  the  best  available  productions  and  especially  any 
restriction  making  it  necessary  to  show  undesirable  pictures  is  to  the 
consumer's  disadvantage. 

20  Hearings,  House  of  Representatives,  pursuant  to  S.  280,  Paramount  schedule,  p.  235. 


32  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

The  proposed  remedies  to  blind  selling  have  included  use  of  the 
cancelation  privilege.  It  is  assumed  that,  in  order  to  maintain  his 
position  in  the  industry,  each  producer  will  attempt  to  maintain 
a  generally  high  standard  of  quality  in  his  releases.  Occasional 
failures  are  presumably  taken  care  of  through  cancelation.  The 
weakness  in  this  system  has  already  been  indicated. 

Once  having  secured  an  exhibition  contract,  it  is  to  the  distributor's 
interest  to  reduce  cancelations  to  a  minimum.  The  various  means  of 
discouraging  use  of  the  cancelation  privilege,  even  where  this  has  been 
granted  by  contract,  go  far  beyond  simply  writing  letters  extolling 
the  drawing  power  of  the  film  which  the  exhibitor  desires  to  cancel. 
This  is  especially  so  in  the  case  of  the  small  independent  exhibitor 
who  may  have  experienced  difficulties  in  assuring  himself  of  a  Qontin- 
uous  film  supply. 

An  alternative  proposal  has  been  that  each  film  included  in  an 
exhibition  contract  be  fully  described  as  to  players,  story,  director,  and 
essential  situations.  Such  a  proposal  is  usually  accompanied  by  some 
prohibition  against  compulsory  block  booking  to  insure  that  the 
exhibitor  may  first  select  only  those  pictures  he  wants  and  then  be 
sure  of  getting  those  pictures  and  no  others.  This  is  the  remedy 
proposed  in  section  4  of  the  Neely  bill. 

It  shall  be  unlawful  ."o'*  any  distributor  of  motion-picture  films  in  commerce  to 
lease  or  offer  to  lease  for  public  exhibition  anj^  motion-picture  film  or  films  over 
two  thousand  feet  in  length  unless  such  distributor  shall  furnish  the  exhibitor 
.at  or  before  the  time  of  making  such  lease  or  offer  to  lease  an  accurate  synopsis 
of  the  contents  of  such  film.  Such  synopsis  shall  be  made  a  part  of  the  lease  and 
^all  include  (a)  a  general  outline  of  the  story  and  descriptions  of  the  principal 
characters,  and  (b)  a  statement  describing  the  manner  of  treatment  of  dialogs 
concerning  any  scenes  depictmg  vice,  crime,  or  suggestion  of  sexual  passion.  It  is 
'the  purpose  of  this  section  to  make  available  to  the  exhibitor  sufl^cient  information 
concerning  the  type  and  contents  of  the  film  and  the  manner  of  treatment  of  ques- 
tionable subject  matter  to  enable  him  to  determine  whether  the  film  is  fairly 
described  by  the  synopsis.^' 

Some  difficulty  mighTltrise  here  through  lack  of  agreement  as  to 
what  constituted  an  accurate  synopsis.  The  interpretations  brought 
out  in  the  House  and  Senate  committee  hearings  afford  a  glimpse  of 
the  misunderstandings  and  litigation  which  might  result  from  such  a 
provision.  Beyond  this,  however,  it  must  be  recognized  that  if  the 
principle  of  sale  in  advance  of  production  is  to  be  continued,  some 
flexibility  in  description  is  probably  desirable  from  the  consumer 
standpoint.  It  is  quite  possible  that  unsuspected  weaknesses  in  a 
scenario  may  develop  during  production  or  even  after  a  preview  show- 
ing. It  is  probably  undesirable  to  make  correction  of  such  weaknesses 
contingent,  among  other  tilings,  on  the  possibility  of  noncompliance 
with  contract  agreements. 

Finally,  it  has  been  suggested  that  distributors  be  required  to  trade 
show  or  preview  each  picture  before  making  any  exhibition  contracts. 
Here  also  it  is  evident  that  some  provisions  regarding  block  booking 
are  necessary.  It  would  avail  the  exhibitor  little  to  have  a  report  on 
the  film  shown  if  he  was  required  to  contract  for  it  regardless  of  his 
opinion  as  to  its  desirability. 

Prescreening  or  trade  showing  has  always  been  opposed  by  tiie 
affiliated  interests.  It  has  been  their  claim  that  prescreening  would 
result  in  serious  dislocations  in  their  long-established  methods  of  doing 

"  S  280,  76th  Cong.,  3d  sess. 


CONCEJSTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  33 

business  and  would  impose  on  them  additional  financial  burdens.  It 
is,  therefore,  interesting  to  note  that  the  subject  of  blind  selling  is 
disposed  of  in  the  recent  consent  decree  by  provision  for  prescreening 
of  all  feature  pictures.  Assent  to  this  provision  by  the  five  affiliated 
companies  marks  a  complete  reversal  of  their  former  position. ^^ 

We  have  considered  various  aspects  of  the  practices  of  block 
booking,  bhnd  selling  and  forcing  of  short  subjects.  One  fact  stands 
out  in  each  case.  It  is  that  each  of  these  practices  is  unequally  applied. 
So  far  as  the  affiliated  interests  themselves  are  concerned,  a  satisfac- 
tory answer  to  the  problems  created  by  the  industry's  selling  system 
has  been  found.  Insistence  on  any  one  of  these  practices  by  one  of 
the  affiliated  companies  in  its  relations  with  another  would  invite 
retaliation.  Since  the  companies  are  generally  not  in  competition 
with  each  other  in  the  exhibition  field,  it  has  been  found  mutually 
more  profitable  to  extend  to  each  other  the  privilege  of  selection. 

The  three  satellite  producer-distributors  are  perforce  required  to 
grant  preferential  treatment  in  the  matter  of  selection  to  the  five 
affiliated  companies.  Their  continued  existence  depends  in  no  small 
part  on  their  ability  to  show  their  pictures  in  the  important  theaters 
controlled  by  the  affiliated  companies. 

Those  who  have  felt  the  weight  of  block  booking,  blind  selling  and 
the  forcing  of  shorts  have  been  in  the  main  the  independent  ex- 
hibitors. The  very  fact  that  the  unsatisfactory  features  of  these 
practices  have  been  avoided  by  the  dominant  elements  within  the 
industry  and  have  remained  to  affect,  over  many  years,  those  outside 
the  controlling  group  suggests  very  strongly  the  basic  cause  of  discord. 
In  the  final  analysis,  the  difficulty  does  not  inherently  lie  in  the  par- 
ticular method  of  selling  which  happens  to  be  in  vogue.  Rather,  it 
rests  in  the  control  exercised  by  the  few  large  integrated  companies 
over  the  feature  films  on  which  the  industry  depends  for  its  existence. 
To  see  this  more  clearly,  let  us  create  an  imaginary  situation. 
Instead  of  8  large  producer-distributors  marketing  an  average  of 
about  50  pictures  each,  let  us  suppose  that  there  are  50  separate 
producer-distributors,  each  marketing  about  8  pictures.  In  this 
hypothetical  situation  the  number  of  features  produced  each  year  is 
roughly  the  same  as  at  present.  How  long  under  such  circumstances 
would  one  of  these  small  producers  remain  in  business  if  he  tried  to 
foist  unsatisfactory  features,  at  a  fancy  price,  on  his  market  in  compe- 
tition with  other  producers,  each  striving  for  a  share  of  the  business? 
Reflection  reveals  that  the  undesirable  features  of  the  present  system 
of  film  sales  are  indissolubly  connected  with  the  high  degree  of  control 
by  a  few  companies  which  exists  in  the  motion-picture  industry- 
today. 

It  has  been  contended  that  any  change  in  the  present  system  ol 
marketing  of  films  would  result  in  financial  losses  to  the  major  pro- 
ducer-distributors. This  argument  has  been  advanced  by  these  com- 
panies themselves  as  a  reason  why  various  legislative  remedies  affect- 
ing these  practices  should  not  be  enacted.  It  is  quite  evident  that  if 
pictures  were  not  sold  in  blocks  but  were  sold  according  to  merit,  severe 
losses  might  be  incurred  on  unpopular  pictures.  Yet,  there  is  no  enter- 
prise that  would  long  stay  in  business  if  the  goods  offered  for  sale  were 
not  liked  by  the  consumer.  There  can  be  no  good  reason  why  the 
motion  picture  industry  should  prove  an  exception  in  this  respect. 

"  The  provisions  of  the  consent  decree  are  discussed  in  detail  in  appendix  III. 


34  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

Dr.  A.  Lawrence  Lowell  of  Harvard  University,  when  refusing  to 
accept  an  appointment  on  the  Code  Authority  for  the  motion  picture 
industry  under  the  National  Recovery  Administration,  stated: 

*  *  *  The  five  large  producing  companies  have,  by  their  business  methods, 
obtained  a  controlHng  grip  upon  the  business  and  are  able  to  put  forth  upon  the 
community  any  films  that  they  please. ^^ 

The  remedy  for  this  situation  was  succintly  stated  in  1935  by  Mr. 
Walter  Lippmann. 

Effective  reform  depends  *  *  *  on  a  clear  understanding  of  what,  given 
the  American  traditions  of  freedom  and  the  variety  of  American  tastes  and 
American  moral  standards,  reform  ought  to  aim  at.  I  would  rest  reform  of  the 
movies  on  this  basic  principle:  That  audiences  shall  have  greater  freedom  to 
choose  their  pictures  and  that  artists  and  producers  shall  have  greater  freedom 
to  make  pictures.  *  *  *  ^^e  best  regulation  would  be  that  exercised  by  the 
■customers  at  the  box  office  of  a  theater.  The  best  way  to  improve  the  movies 
would  be  to  open  the  door  to  intense  competition  by  independent  and  experiment- 
ing producers. 

If  the  customers  had  freedom  of  choice,  each  community  would  be  able  to 
enforce  the  moral  standards  it  believes  in.  Each  exhibitor  would  have  to  take 
the  business  risk  of  estimating  correctly  the  tastes  of  his  customers  *  *  *  This 
is  the  system  under  which  theaters,  books,  magazines,  and  newspapers  operate 
and  it  is  not  an  unsatisfactory  system.  Anyone,  who  can  find  a  little  capital,  can 
produce  what  he  chooses.  But  then  he  has  to  submit  his  production  to  the  test 
of  circulation.  The  highbrow  and  the  lowbrow,  the  libertine  and  the  puritan, 
tend  to  find  their  own  audiences." 

DESIGNATED  PLAY  DATES 

Through  block  booking  and  forcing  of  short  subjects  and  other 
features,  the  producer-distributors  have  assured  themselves  a  steady 
market  for  their  product.  But  a  steady  market  in  itself  is  not  enough. 
Along  with  steadiness  must  go  profitableness.  And  this  has  in  part 
been  effected  through  the  practice  of  designating  play  dates. 

The  amount  of  film  rental  to  be  paid  for  a  picture  may  be  specified 
in  several  different  ways.  It  may  be  agreed  that  a  definite  flat  fee 
will  be  charged  for  a  particular  showing.  In  another  case,  the  dis- 
tributor may  accept  as  his  rental  a  proportion  of  the  box-office  receipts 
taken  in  during  the  exhibition  of  a  pictm-e.  Alternatively,  some 
combination  of  these  methods  may  be  employed.  In  the  usual  small- 
theater  agreement  most  of  the  features  are  licensed  on  a  flat  rental 
basis,  but  it  is  usually  specified  that  some  of  the  pictures,  those  con- 
sidered likely  to  be  the  best  box-office  attractions,  shall  be  paid  for  on 
a  percentage  basis. 

All  days  of  the  week  do  not  bring  the  same  revenue  to  the  box  office. 
Attendance  is  greater  on  weekends  and  holidays,  and  admission  prices 
are  commonly  higher  at  such  times.  The  following  table  illustrates 
how  various  days  of  the  week  are  usually  judged  from  their  potential 
box-office  standpoint.^*" 

Percent  Percent 


Saturday 20 

Sunday 25 

Total 100 


Monday 10 

Tuesday  _- 10 

Wednesday 10 

Thufsuay 10 

Friday 15 

23  National  Recovery  Administration,  Work  Materials  No.  34,  p.  80. 
2<  New  York  Herald  Tribune,  January  12,  1935. 

2''''  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce,  Department  of  Commerce,  Motion  Pictures  Abroad, 
March  15,  liHO. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  35 

Because  of  these  differences,  distributors  are  interested  in  seeing 
that  percentage  pictures  play  on  those  days  of  the  week  when  box-office 
returns  are  likely  to  be  greater.  This  is  accomplished  by  designating 
that  the  percentage  pictures  shall  be  exhibited  on  holidays  or  weekends. 

The  small  exhibitor  frequently  opposes  this  practice.  Primarily, 
he  objects  to  any  restriction  which  keeps  him  from  operating  his 
theater  as  he  pleases.  In  some  cases,  the  small  theater  operator  would 
prefer  to  use  a  less  satisfactory  picture  on  a  weekend,  knowing  that 
in  any  case  attendance  is  likely  to  be  satisfactory  at  that  time,  and 
use  a  stronger  drawing  attraction  to  bolster  midweek  returns.  The 
practice  may  maximize  the  distributor's  revenue  without  performing 
a  like  function  for  the  exhibitor. 

Consumer  interest  in  the  practice  of  designating  play  dates  is 
probably  small.  Where  an  exhibitor  shows  the  more  desirable  pic- 
tures in  midweek,  the  consumer,  who  usually  has  less  leisure  at  that 
time,  may  find  that  his  interests  lie  parallel  to  those  of  the  distributor. 
On  the  other  hand,  control  of  play  dates  by  distributors  may  result, 
for  example,  in  weekend  bookings  for  sophisticated  features  in  a 
theater  whose  audiences  in  the  aggregate  may  prefer  films  more 
suited  for  general  family  entertainment. 

The  ability  to  designate  play  dates  is  another  indication  of  the 
large  distributors'  control  over  the  Sources  of  supply  of  the  industry 
and  of  the  unequal  bargaining  strength  of  exhibitors  and  distributors. 

On  the  whole,  however,  the  practice  is  primarily  an  industry  rather 
than  a  consumer  problem. 

OTHER   PRACTICES   AFFECTING    DISTRIBUTDR-EXHIBITOR   RELATIONSHIPS 

The  practices  discussed  up  to  this  point  by  no  means  exhaust  all 
sources  of  friction  between  distributors  and  exhibitors.  A  minor  one 
which  may  be  mentioned  is  the  practice  of  making  score  charges. 
The  score  charge  is  a  fossillized  remnant  of  the  pre-sound  days  of  the 
industry.  Before  the  development  of  sound,  distributors  usually 
supplied  with  each  film  an  appropria't^«  musical  accompaniment.  The 
fee  charged  for  this  service  was  known  as  a  score  charge.  In  the  first 
sound  films,  the  sound  was  supplied  by  discs  which  were  played  in 
synchronization  with  the  film,  and  the  score  charge  was  attached  to 
these  disks.  Today,  sound  is  recorded  directly  on  the  film.  Never- 
theless, distributors  continue  in  many  cases  to  make  a  score  charge. 
This  irritating  and  apparently  useless  appendage  of  an  earlier  era 
serves  constantly  to  annoy  exhibitors  who  find  this  extra  charge  in 
their  license  agreements. 

More  important  in  point  of  distributor-exhibitor  relationships  is  a 
practice  charged  to  affiliated  distributors  by  independent  exhibitors. 
It  has  been  alleged  that  exhibitors  have  been  coerced  into  paying 
higher  film  rentals  or  into  relinquishing  an  interest  in  a  profitable 
theater  by  threats  that  the  distributor  would  build  or  acquire  a  com- 
peting theater.  Such  a  threat  is  powerful  indeed,  since  the  inde- 
pendent exhibitor  is  well  aware  that  a  competing  affiliated  theater 
will  usually  receive  a  choice  of  the  available  pictures  by  virtue  of  the 
cooperative  arrangements  existing  between  the  major  companies. 

In  this  field  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  between  the  operations  of  the 
affiliated  company  as  an  exhibitor  or  as  a  distributor.  Powerful 
independent  theater  chains  have  found  the  means  to  enter  localities 


Qg  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

and  take  over  the  businesses  of  competing  exhibitors  by  means  whichi 
will  be  subsequently  discussed.  The  exact  method  whereby  a  similar- 
result  has  been  achieved  by  an  affiliated  company  is  sometimes  diffi- 
cult to  ascertain.  The  possibilities  are  illustrated  by  a  contempt 
citation  against  the  Fox  West  Coast  Theatres  Corporation — the- 
exhibition  branch  of  the  Twentieth  Century-Fox  organization.  This- 
charge  states: 

As  a  result  of  the  practices  and  activities  described  in  this  Petition  and 
Information,  many  unaffiliated  exhibitors  in  the  Los  Angeles  Exchange  Territory 
have  been  unable  either  to  contract  for  first  or  second  run  or  first  suburban  run 
pictures,  or  to  contract  for  pictures  to  exhibit  in  competition  with  defendant 
Fox  West  Coast,  and  therefore  have  been  impelled  either  to  sell  their  theaters.' 
outright  to  Fox  West  Coast,  or  to  enter  into  profit-sharing  agreements,  or  pooling 
arrangements,  so-called,  under  which  the  unaffiliated  exhibitor  has  granted  Fox 
West  Coast  a  controlling  interest  in  his  theater  or  has  poofed  the  theater  with  a 
theater  operated  by  defendant  Fox  West  Coast,  which  receives  an  equal  or  con- 
trolling interest  in  the  venture.^^ 

The  charge  then  names  26  unaffiliated  theaters  which  were  turned 
over  to  Fox  West  Coast  or  pooled  with  its  theaters  between  1932  and. 

1936.  , .        , 

While  it  is  quite  true  that  a  similar  result  might  have  been  achieved 
by  a  powerful  independent  exhibition  chain,  it  is  nevertheless  reason- 
able to  assume  that  the  affiliation  of  the  exhibition  organization  with- 
one  of  the  major  producers  was  no  hindrance  to  these  activities. 

The  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry, 
promulgated  under  the  N.  R.  A.,  declared  it  to  be  an  unfair  trade 
practice  for  any  distributor  to  threaten,  coerce  or  intimidate  any 
exhibitor  into  entering  a  contract  for  the  exhibition  of  motion  pictures 
or  into  paying  higher  film  rentals  by  the  commission  of  any  overt 
act  evidencing  an  intention  to  build  or  acquire  a  competing  theater.^^' 
It  was  added,  however,  that  this  should  in  no  way  abrogate  the  right 
of  a  producer  or  distributor  to  build  or  acquire  in  good  faith  a  theater- 
in  any  location.  The  efJect  of  this  proviso  was  to  nullify  the  entire 
clause,  since  it  was  incumbent  on  the  aggrieved  party  to  prove  the; 
act  was  not  in  good  faith. 

That  both  of  these  practices — making  score  charges  and  coercion 
of  exhibitors  into  entering  film  contracts,  into  paying  higher  film 
rentals  or  into  relinquishing  control  of  their  theaters — still  constitute 
sources  of  discord  in  the  industry  is  seen  from  the  fact  that  these 
practices  are  included  among  the  charges  made  by  the  Government 
against  the  major  companies  in  the  recent  antitrust  suit.^^  The  con- 
sent decree  recently  entered  as  a  result  of  this  suit,  however,  contains 
no  stipulation  with  respect  to  either  of  these  practices. 

OVERBUYING 

Overbuying  of  films  is  a  practice  whereby  an  exhibitor  licenses  more 
features  than  are  strictly  necessary  for  the  operation  of  a  theater, 
with  the  express  intention  of  preventing  a  competitor  from  securing" 
enough  good  pictures  to  permit  normal  operations.  It  is  a  constant 
threat  to  the  small  exhibitor  competing  with  a  powerful  opponent. 

2»  United  States  of  America  v.  Fox  West  Const  Theaters  Corporation,  et  al.,  in  the  District  Court  of  the  United 
States  for  the  Southern  District  of  California,  Central  Division,  information  charging  criminal  contempt 
and  petition  for  rule  to  show  cause,  No.  14048-C,  filed  Aug.  31,  1939. 

^  National  Recovery  Administration,  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry,  art.  V,. 
dtviBion  D,  Part  1  of  the  approved  code,  1933. 

"  United  States  v.  Paramount,  Inc.,  1940. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  37- 

The  fear  aroused  by  this  practice  may  be  judged  from  the  fact  that 
about  85  percent  of  the  complaints  submitted  to  the  N.  R.  A.  before' 
formulation  of  the  code  for  the  motion  picture  industry  dealt  with 
some  form  of  overbuying. ^^ 

Overbuying  manifests  itself  in  many  ways.  In  its  simplest  form, 
an  exhibitor  buys  more  pictures  than  he  can  use,  simply  to  prevent 
their  use  by  a  competitor.  Overbuying  may  also  take  the  form  of 
unnecessary  and  too  frequent  changes  of  program  which,  as  in  the 
first  instance,  results  in  a  shortage  of  films  available  to  competing 
exhibitors.  In  still  another  form,  an  exhibitor,  as  a  condition  to 
entering  into  a  contract,  may  require  that  a  distributor  refrain  from 
licensing  pictures  to  a  competitor.  Such  an  agreement,  which  gives 
the  exhibitor  sole  exhibition  rights  in  his  locality,  is  known  as  an 
''exclusive  rights"  contract. 

The  effect  of  overbuying  on  the  consumer  is  so  obvious  that  it 
hardly  needs  to  be  depicted.  In  the  first  place,  if  the  number  of 
operating  theaters  is  actually  reduced,  there  is  an  economic  loss  to  the 
community,  since  no  new  enterprise  enters  the  field  to  take  the  place 
of  that  deposed.  The  practice  may  result  in  the  absolute  reduction 
of  the  number  of  films  shown  in  the  locality  where  an  exhibitor  makes 
them  unavailable  to  a  competitor  but  does  not  use  them  himself. 

As  an  alternative  to  this  practice,  the  offending  exhibitor  sometimes 
attempts  to  show  the  pictures  by  resorting  to  a  policy  of  frequent 
changes  of  program.  This  not  only  limits  the  consumer  in  his  choice  of 
a  place  and  a  time  to  see  particular  films.  It  may  mean  complete  loss 
of  opportunity  to  see  particular  features  since  in  the  localities  in  -vyhich 
overbuying  is  most  common,  a  teature  is  seldom  shown  more  than  once. 
Finally,  if  the  practice  succeeds  in  its  objective  of  eliminating  all 
competition,  the  protection  afforded  to  the  consumer  by  this  com- 
petition is  wholly  lost.  The  consumer  remains  with  only  the  choice  of 
seeing  pictures  on  terms  offered  by  the  exhibitor  or  not  seeing  them 
at  all. 

Overbuying,  when  undertaken  with  the  express  purpose  of  elimi- 
nating competition,  is  almost  certainly  a  violation  of  the  Federal  anti- 
trust statutes.  Consequently,  a  number  of  complaints  against  over- 
buying have  from  time  to  time  been  filed  in  the  Federal  courts.  A 
case  pending  at  the  present  time  may  be  used  to  illustrate  the  general 
tenor  of  such  suits. '^ 

The  complamant  states  that  he  started  operating  the  Palace  Theater 
in  St.  Johnsbury,  Vt.,  in  the  fall  of  1926.  Shortly  after,  another  inde- 
pendent, the  Star  Theater,  was  opened  in  the  same  town.  Both  thea- 
ters operated  on  a  policy  of  3  to  4  films  weekly,  and  each  secured  about 
one-half  of  all  the  major  distributors'  product.  For  profitable  opera- 
tion each  theater  needed  approximately  200  films  annually. 

In  August  1935,  the  Interstate  Theater  Corporation,  an  extensive 
New  England  chain,  leased  the  Star  through  a  subsidiary.  The  oper- 
ator of  the  Palace  alleges  that  Interstate  then  made  contracts  wjth 
the  major  distributors  whereby  the  Star  was  granted  special  privileges, 
including  price  concessions,  priority  in  play  dates,  rights  of  selection 
of  pictures  and  cancelation  privileges,  and  that  due  to  the  strong  bar- 
gaining power  of  Interstate,  the  major  distributors  refused  to  license 

"  National  Recovery  Administration,  Work  Materials  No.  34,  p.  70. 

"  Tegu's  Palace  Theatre,  Ivc.  v.  Interstate  Theatre  Corporation,  et  al.,  Civil  Action  No.  25,  District  Court 
of  the  United  States,  District  of  Vermont. 

286782 — 41— No.  43 4 


38  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

quality  films  to  the  Palace  Theater.  Finally,  the  operator  of  the  Palace 
claims  that  in  the  fall  of  1935  Interstate  changed  the  operating  policy 
of  the  Star  Theater  from  showing  3  or  4  pictures  weekly  to  approxi- 
mately 6,  thus  absorbing  most  of  the  desirable  films  produced.  The 
complainant  asks  an  injunction  against  the  continuance  of  the  alleged 
discrimination  and  liquidated  damages  to  the  extent  of  three  times 
the  loss  he  has  suffered. 

The  failure  of  the  antitrust  statutes  completely  to  check  overbuying 
perhaps  lies  primarily  in  the  difficulty  of  determining  whether  in  any 
particular  instance  contracts  are  made  with  the  express  intention  of 
eliminating  competition  or  simply  as  a  normal  consequence  of  com- 
petitive conditions. 

The  Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry 
recognized  the  existence  of  the  practice  and  incorporated  a  provision 
expressly  forbidding  overbuying  in  any  form,  no  matter  how  accom- 
plished.^ Moreover,  it  was  a  function  of  the  31  grievance  boards 
set  up  under  the  code  in  the  different  exchange  areas  to  hear  com- 
plaints with  respect  to  overbuying  and  to  grant  affirmative  relief  in 
cases  where  the  practice  had  been  used.  These  grievance  boards, 
set  up  shortly  after  the  code  became  operative  on  December  7,  19313, 
reported  that  164  overbuying  cases  had  been  considered  by  April  1, 
1935.  While  exact  information  is  not  available,  it  is  known  that 
overbuying  was  found  to  have  existed  in  a  number  of  cases. 

Overbuying  is  usually  found  only  in  the  smaller  communities. 
The  primary  objective  of  the  practice  is  to  stifle  and,  if  possible,  to 
eliminate  competition  by  preempting  the  film  supply.  This  is 
generally  possible  only  when  the  number  of  competing  theaters  in 
the  area  is  small.  In  the  larger  communities,  a  picture  will  usually 
sustain  several  showings,  and  the  exhibitor  unable  to  secm-e  pictures 
on  some  preferred  run,  may  generally  show  them  at  a  later  date  and 
at  a  lower  admission  price.  In  such  situations,  the  powerful  exhibitor 
may  use  selective  contracts,  extended  clearance,  or  unfairly  specified 
admission  prices  (q.  v.)  to  restrict  the  opportunities  of  smaller  com- 
petitors. 

There  is  an  even  more  necessary  limitation  on  the  use  of  overbuy- 
ing. The  exhibitor  resorting  to  the  practice  must  by  some  means 
secure  the  cooperation  of  the  important  distributors — not  a  few  of 
them  but  aU  or  nearly  all.  It  follows  that  these  distributors  must  be 
offered  some  consideration  of  greater  importance  to  them  than  the 
rentals  which  might  be  paid  by  the  theater  unable  to  secure  films. 
This  requirement  wiU  seldom,  if  ever,  be  fulfilled  where  two  exhibitors 
compete  on  relatively  even  terms;  the  overbuying  exhibitor  is  nearly 
always  found  to  be  operating  a  chain  of  theaters.  Each  distributor 
is  moved  to  cooperate  by  the  tlireat  that  failure  to  assist  in  the  dis- 
establishment of  the  exhibitor  against  whom  the  practice  is  to  be  used 
will  be  followed  by  a  boycott  of  the  distributor's  films  in  some  of  the 
chain's  theaters,  with  a  consequent  loss  in  revenue.  Where  two 
affiliated  companies  are  involved,  the  promise  of  mutual  assistance 
in  similar  situations  may  also  be  a  factor. 

The  intent  of  overbuying  is  to  achieve  a  local  monopoly  in  the 
exhibition  of  pictures  by  eliminating  all  competition.  To  attain  this 
end,  the  buying  power  of  large  numbers  of  theaters,  located  perhaps 

30  National  Recovery  Administration,  Code  of  Fair  Competition  (or  the  Motion  Picture  Industry,  art. 
VI,  Part  2,  sec.  1  of  the  approved  code. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  39 

in  many  States,  is  brought  to  bear  on  a  single  local  competitive  situa- 
tion. Overbuying  may  be  practiced  by  a  large  independent  theater 
organization,  but  an  affiliated  theater  has  an  additional  advantage  in 
that  it  can  usually  count  on  the  cooperation  of  the  other  large  dis- 
tributors. The  practice  is  clearly  a  manifestation  of  the  power  of 
the  large  bargaining  unit  in  the  exhibition  field. 

SELECTIVE    CONTRACTS 

Results  similar  to  overbuying  are  achieved  in  large  cities  through 
selective  contracts.  By  means  of  this  device,  the  large  exhibitor  may 
contract  for  all  the  pictures  released  by  a  distributor,  but  obligate 
himself  to  use  and  pay  for  only  a  part  of  these.  The  features  to  be 
used  are  selected  after  release,  and  after  the  pictures  have  been  tested 
for  box-office  value.  Under  these  contracts  the  large  exhibitor  is  also 
allowed  extended  playing  time  on  hit  pictures,  which  tends  to  make  his 
requirements  unpredictable.  Nor  are  rejected  pictures  made  avail- 
able to  competing  exhibitors  soon  after  national  release.  Instead, 
selection  may  be  delayed  so  as  to  hold  up  exhibition  of  pictures  in 
competing  theaters.  Since  much  of  the  value  of  pictures  depends  on 
their  timeliness,  this  may  operate  alike  to  the  disadvantage  of  com- 
peting exhibitors,  consumers,  and  the  cooperating  distributors. 

Use  of  selective  contracts  as  an  unfair  competitive  device  was 
recognized  in  the  N.  R.  A.  code  for  the  industry.  A  provision  of  the 
code  required  that  pictures  bought  on  a  selective  basis  be  accepted  or 
rejected  within  21  days  after  their  availability  in  the  exhibition  terri- 
tory where  the  theater  was  located  was  announced  by  the  distributor.^'^ 

The  effects  of  selective  contracts  may  be  illustrated  in  Chicago, 
where  the  Balaban  and  Katz  theater  chain,  affiliated  with  Paramount, 
dominates  the  exhibition  field.  In  the  3-year  period  from  November 
1935  to  November  1938,  Balaban  and  Katz  had  exclusive  choice  of  all 
features  released  by  Loew's,  Warner's,  Paramount,  and  Fox  for  first- 
run  exhibition  in  its  "Loop"  theaters.  These  companies  released  a 
total  of  670  features  in  this  interval,  exclusive  of  reissues,  and  of  these 
only  388  were  shown  by  Balaban  and  Katz  in  the  ''Loop"  theaters. 
During  the  same  period,  United  Artist's  released  57  features,  47  were 
hcensed  by  Balaban  and  Katz,  and  4G  were  shown  in  these  houses.^^ 

The  control  by  Balaban  and  Katz  of  the  product  of  four  of  the  five 
major  companies  resulted  in  a  delay  in  the  first  showing  of  many 
pictures  until  they  could  conveniently  be  booked  into  one  of  the 
''Loop"  theaters.  Motion  picture  patrons  in  Chicago  thus  had  their 
first  opportunity  to  attend  many  popular  features  more  than  two 
months  after  the  pictures  had  been  nationally  released. ^^  Because  of 
the  prior  playing  position  of  the  Balaban  and  Katz  "Loop"  theaters, 
these  delays  were  likewise  forced  upon  the  customers  of  all  theaters 
in  the  entire  Chicago  exchange  area. 

"  Ibid.,  art.  V,  division  E,  Part  1. 

^  United  States  v.  Balaban,  et  at.,  criminal  action  No.  31,230,  in  the  District  Court  of  the  United  Stains  for 
the  Northern  District  of  Illinois,  Eastern  Division,  proposed  findings  of  fact  submitted  on  behalf  of  the 
Government,  p.  50.  During  this  period  R-K-O  and  Universal  features  were  shown  in  a  first-run  theater 
operated  by  R-K-O. 

"  Among  many,  these  features  were  first  shown  in  Chicago  the  following  number  of  days  after  national 
release:  "Tovarich,"  68  days;  "Rembrandt,"  63  days;  "Topper,"  60  days;  "Captains  Courageous,"  56 
days'  "A  Night  at  the  Opera,"  60  days. 


40  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

CLEARANCE    AND    ZONING 

In  the  early  days  of  the  industry  (as  pointed  out  in  ch.  I)  distrib- 
utors made  a  number  of  prints  of  each  film  and  sold  them  outright 
to  exhibitors.  The  prints  were  released  for  simultaneous  exhibition 
in  a  number  of  theaters  in  the  same  territory.  It  was  soon  discovered 
that  consecutive  showing  of  films  by  the  several  exhibitors  in  a  com- 
petitive situation  was  more  economical  and  this  method  of  distribu- 
tion became  general. 

Since  the  potential  market  of  the  first  exhibitor  of  a  film  was  the 
greatest,  a  higher  rental  fee  was  asked  for  the  earlier  showings.  In 
consideration  of  the  higher  rental  paid,  a  prior  run  exhibitor  was 
granted  "protection"  over  competing  theaters.  This  consisted 
of  a  stipulation  that  no  competing  theaters  should  show  the  same  film 
until  a  specified  period  of  time  had  elapsed  after  the  completion  of  the 
particular  showing  licensed.  This  period  of  time  came  to  be  known 
as  "clearance."  The  term  "zoning"  was  adopted  to  designate  the 
area  over  which  clearance  was  effective,  and  "run"  to  indicate  a 
theater's  playing  p'  sition.  The  theater  first  showing  films  in  a  zone 
is  known  as  the  firs'u-run  theater.  Correspondingly,  there  are  second- 
run  theaters,  third-run,  and  so  on. 

In  the  early  stages  of  development,  clearance  systems  were  far  from 
uniform.  The  protection  and  run  enjoyed  by  an  exhibitor  might 
vary  with  the  identity  of  the  distributor  from  whom  films  were 
licensed.  Largely  by  trial  and  error,  clearance  arrangements  began 
to  fall  into  a  pattern  in  which  each  theater  occupied  a  definite  place. 
Today,  a  theater  usually  negotiates  similar  run  and  protection  terms 
from  each  distributor  that  supplies  him  with  films. 

The  establishment  of  clearance  schedules  is  an  intricate  procedure. 
It  involves  a  complex  bargaining  process  and  the  balance  of  a  variety 
of  opposing  economic  interests.  It  may  be  stated  initially  that  the 
primary  objective  of  the  distributor  is,  of  course,  to  maximize  his 
total  revenue  from  each  picture.  This  aim  gives  him  a  very  direct 
interest  in  clearance  periods.  The  higher  rental  fees  paid  by  the 
prior-run  exhibitor  are  directly  conditioned  on  the  extent  of  the  pro- 
tection which  he  is  granted,  and  in  general  the  longer  the  clearance 
period  before  subsequent  showing,  the  higher  the  rental  fee  the  prior- 
run  exhibitor  will  pay. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  distributor's  revenue  from  subsequent-run 
exhibition  is  also  important  to  him ;  this  income  may  mean  the  differ- 
ence between  black  or  red  ink  on  his  ledgers.  But  the  longer  the 
clearance  period,  the  smaller  will  be  these  returns— not  only  because 
more  customers  will  have  attended  the  prior  showing  rather  than  wait 
for  subsequent  exhibition,  but  also  because  the  effects  of  the  adver- 
tising and  exploitation  efforts  made  when  the  picture  was  released 
will  have  been  vitiated  over  this  time.  In  general,  the  greater  the 
total  box-office  return  earned  by  a  film  in  all  showings,  the  greater 
will  be  the  distributor's  revenue. 

Opposed  to  the  distributor  in  the  bargaining  processes  are  the 
theater  operators  in  a  particular  competitive  location.  The  first 
factor  to  be  settled  is  the  run  enjoyed  by  a  particular  theater.  This 
is  primarily  determined  by  the  amount  of  sales  which  the  theater  can 
be  expected  to  make.  This  in  turn  is  a  function  of  the  theater's 
seating  capacity,   its  location,   the  newness  and  desirability  of  its 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  41 

facilities,  and  the  admission  prices  which  it  can  charge.  First-run 
showings  are  usually  booked  into  the  theaters  having  the  largest 
potential  box-office  receipts,  since  such  theaters  can  pay  the  highest 
film  rentals.  Such  theaters  are,  of  course,  the  largest  houses  centrally 
located  in  cities  so  as  to  draw  audiences  from  an  entire  metropolitan 
area. 

The  objective  of  the  operator  of  a  first-run  theater  is  to  bargain  for 
as  much  protection  over  subsequent  showings  as  possible  since  in  this 
way  he  tends  to  increase  his  total  revenues.  The  length  of  the  clear- 
ance period  must,  however,  be  balanced  against  the  higher  film  rentals 
which  will  be  charged  by  the  distributor  for  extended  protection. 
The  operator  of  a  subsequent-run  theater  may  have  to  consider  not 
only  the  protection  over  still  later  showings,  but  also  his  position  with 
respect  to  prior  exhibition. 

The  admission  price  charged  by  a  theater  is  always  an  important 
element  in  setting  clearance  periods.  It  is  the  universal  practice  for 
the  distributor  to  stipulate  in  each  exhibition  contract  the  minimum 
admission  price  at  which  films  may  be  shown.  This  is  not  done  simply 
to  protect  the  distributor's  interest  in  pictures  which  may  be  licensed 
on  percentage  terms.  Customarily,  each  subsequent  showing  of  a 
film  in  a  competitive  area  is  made  at  a  lower  admission  price.  The 
subsequent  sale  value  of  a  film  may-,  therefore,  in  large  part  be  deter- 
mined by  the  admission  prices  which  have  been  charged  in  the  prior- 
run  theaters. 

The  relation  between  clearance  and  admission  is  quite  flexible.  In 
general,  the  higher  the  admission  price  charged  by  any  particular 
exhibitor,  the  longer  the  clearance  period  which  will  be  granted  by  the 
distributor.  Conversely,  admission  prices  can  generally  be  reduced 
only  at  the  expense  of  less  satisfactory  protection  terms.  Clearance 
and  admission  prices  can  thus  not  be  considered  separately.  It  may 
well  be  that  the  location  of  a  theater  will  determine  the  admission 
prices  which  it  can  charge,  and  this  in  turn  will  fix  the  theater's 
clearance  period. 

The  complex  bargaining  involved  makes  the  establishment  of  clear- 
ance schedules  difficult  indeed,  but  these  difficulties  rise  almost 
wholly  in  urban  areas.  Clearance  presents  few  problems  in  small 
towns  or  isolated  areas  where  not  more  than  two  or  three  theaters  are 
in  direct  competition.  Such  theaters  may  play  behind  the  prior-run 
houses  in  the  large  cities,  but  this  is  not  likely  materially  to  afi^ect 
their  revenues.  Moreover,  even  in  the  large  cities,  it  is  the  establish- 
ment of  equitable  clearance  periods  between  the  first-run  and  subse- 
quent-run theaters  which  is  most  difficult.  The  longest  clearance 
period  is  usually  set  between  the  first  showing  of  a  film  in  the  large 
downtown  theaters  and  any  subsequent  showing.  Clearance  between 
subsequent  runs  is  frequently  quite  brief. 

The  relation  between  run,  clearance  and  zoning,  admission  price, 
seating  capacity,  and  rental  fees  is  indeed  a  complex  one.  The  range 
covered  by  these  factors  is  indicated  by  this  fact:  a  license  fee  amount- 
ing to  many  thousands  of  dollars  may  be  paid  for  the  first  showing  of 
a  film  in  a  large  metropolitan  theater,  and  within  a  year  the  same 
film  may  be  exhibited  in  some  small  theater  in  the  same  city  for  a  fee 
of  less  than  $20. 

A  further  indication  is  given  by  the  experience  of  the  feature 
"Gorie  With  the  Wind."  This  picture  was  released  early  in  1940  for 
showing  at  substantially  advanced  admission  prices.     At  this  time  it 


42  GONOENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

was  advertised  that  the  film  would  not  be  shown  again  at  lower  prices 
before  1941.  Nevertheless,  despite  the  advanced  admission  prices, 
public  interest  in  the  picture  was  so  great  that  record-breaking  num- 
bers of  persons  paid  $1  or  more  each  rather  than  wait  until  the  film 
was  available  at  a  lower  figure.  It  is  reported  that  the  receipts  frotn 
this  single  showing  at  advanced  prices  more  than  covered  the  entire 
production  and  exploitation  costs  of  the  picture,  though  these  wer^ 
large.  Because  of  the  high  admission  prices  originally  charged,  the 
picture  will  continue  to  bring  in  revenue  for  some  time  to  come. 
Nor  will  admission  prices  soon  be  reduced  to  those  usually  charged  for 
subsequent-run  showing.  It  may  be  parenthetically  noted  that  the 
rental  fees  charged  exhibitors  for  this  showing  were  likewise  record- 
breaking  in  many  instances.  This  case  is  an  unusual  one,  but  it  never- 
theless indicates  the  important  relationship  between  clearance, 
admission  price,  and  film  rentals. 

In  the  idealized  situation  where  all  the  elements  of  the  industry 
are  in  active  competition  with  one  another,  the  clearance  pattern 
resulting  may  be  considered  to  come  from  a  balancing  of  the  conflicting 
objectives  of  each  of  the  elements.  A  clearance  system  of  this  type 
probably  represents  the  best  method  for  distribution  of  motion  pic- 
tures which  could  be  devised.  It  permits  the  distribution  of  films 
both  rapidly  and  economically.  Moreover,  the  resulting  exliibition 
pattern  is  relatively  stable,  in  itself  an  advantage  to  the  consumer. 
But,  like  many  other  systems  which  in  an  economic  sense  may  be 
basically  sound,  the  clearance  system  is  subject  to  abuse  by  dominating 
elements  within  the  industry. 

Powerful  exhibition  interests  competing  with  weaker  rivals  have 
demanded  extended  clearance  periods  from  distributors,  and  have 
insisted  that  they  be  granted  protection  over  geographical  areas  larger 
than  could  be  warranted  in  any  economic  sense.  In  view  of  the  larger 
aggregate  rentals  paid  by  these  dominating  exhibition  units  as  com- 
pared with  their  smaller  competitors,  and  the  fear  that  these  rentals 
might  be  reduced  or  withdrawn,  distributors  in  many  cases  have  ac- 
quiesced to  these  demands. 

The  primary  reason  for  the  negotiation  of  extended  protection  has 
been,  of  course,  the  simple  desire  to  hear  the  cheery  ring  of  the  bell  in 
the  cash  register.  A  theater  able  to  negotiate  extended  clearance 
without  being  required  to  pay  correspondingly  higher  rentals  tends  to 
draw  patronage  away  from  competing  subsequent-run  exhibitors. 
That  this  practice  may  render  the  competitor's  business  wholly  un- 
profitable may  not  be  an  undesirable  aspect  of  the  situation.  If 
the  large  exhibitor  is  able  to  acquire  cheaply  the  properties  of  his 
competitors,  he  may  achieve  a  local  monopoly  of  the  exhibition  field,. 
In  this  case  the  admission  prices  and  clearance  periods  which  are 
established  will  be  designed  solely  to  enhance  his  profits  at  the  expense 
of  all  motion  picture  patrons  in  the  locality,  so  far  as  this  may  be 
permitted  by  the  distributors. 

The  consumer  interest  in  unfair  clearance  is  quite  clear.  Th& 
consumer  desires  to  see  each  picture  as  promptly  as  possible  and  at  the 
lowest  admission  price  compatible  with  continued  desirable  service. 
It  is  quite  evident  that  unfair  clearance,  whether  present  as  such  or 
carried  through  to  the  ultimate  objective  of  a  local  monopoly,  directly 
contravenes  the  interests  of  the  consumer. 

Unfair  clearance  is  not  primarily  a  question  of  producer-distributor 
control  of  exhibition.     It  has  been  employed  repeatedily  by  large 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  43 

independent  theater  organizations.  Nevertheless,  the  practice  has 
been  closely  identified  with  the  theater  operations  of  the  major 
companies.  As  has  been  already  indicated,  the  five  major  companies 
control  and  operate  a  great  number  of  large  prior-run  theaters  through- 
out the  United  States.  Since  unfair  clearance  is  most  usually  insti- 
tuted by  such  theaters  over  subsequent-rim  competitors,  this  control 
is  most  significant.  Moreover,  since  these  major  companies  in 
general  do  not  compete  with  each  other  in  their  theater  operation 
activities,  the  mutual  advantages  to  be  derived  from  reciprocal 
permission  to  enforce  unfair  protection  terms  on  subsequent-run 
exhibitors  must  not  be  disregarded. 

Indicative  of  the  different  types  of  situations  which  may  develop 
contingent  upon  the  control  of  theaters  by  one  of  the  affiliated  com- 
panies is  the  practice  with  respect  to  clearance  between  first  and 
subsequent-runs  in  Washington,  D.  C,  and  in  Atlanta,  Ga.  In 
Washington  six  downtown  theaters  are  operated  by  three  major 
companies,  but  the  majority  of  the  neighborhood  houses  throughout 
the  city  are  owned  and  operated  by  Warner  Bros.  In  general,  the 
clearance  of  the  first-run  theaters  over  Warner's  neighborhood  houses 
amounts  to  about  28  days.  Obviously,  in  Washington  it  is  to  the 
advantage  of  Warner  Bros,  to  arrange  clearance  schedules  to  maximize 
the  revenue  of  their  neighborhood  .theaters,  so  far  as  this  does  not 
conflict  with  reasonable  profits  in  the  first-run  houses. 

Contrasting  with  this,  five  first-run  theaters  are  operated  by  two 
affiliated  companies  in  Atlanta.  No  one  of  the  major  companies 
operates  subsequent-run  theaters  in  this  city.  The  interests  of  the 
two  major  companies  operating  these  first-run  theaters  are  obviously 
best  served  by  extending  clearance  periods  so  as  to  divert  as  large  a 
share  as  possible  of  exhibition  revenue  into  the  first-run  houses. 
The  clearance  period  in  Atlanta  on  first-quality  pictures  is  in  the 
neighborhood  of  60  days  or  more. 

Because  of  the  disadvantageous  position  of  the  small  independent 
exhibitor  in  negotiating  clearance,  as  compared  with  the  affiliated 
exhibitors  and  the  large  independent  circuits,  unfair  clearance  has 
become  one  of  the  most  frequent  and  the  most  serious  complaints  by 
independent  exhibitors.  There  has  indeed  been  a  strong  basis  for 
their  claims.  Where  they  have  been  subject  to  unfair  protection 
restrictions,  their  profits  have  soon  become  losses.  More  than  one 
exhibitor  has  seen  his  theater  investment  depreciated  in  value  until 
he  decided  the  only  thing  to  do  was  to  close  its  doors.  Practically 
every  legal  action  filed  by  an  independent  exhibitor  or  by  the  Govern- 
ment against  an  affiliated  company  or  an  independent  theater  circuit 
has  contained  charges  of  inequitable  clearance  and  zoning. 

Peculiarly  enough,  the  interests  of  the  distributor  without  theater 
connections  in  a  particular  locality  to  some  extent  parallel  those  of 
the  consumer  and  the  independent  exhibitor.  Unfair  clearance  is 
granted  by  a  distributor  to  theaters  affiliated  with  another  distributpr 
or  forming  part  of  an  independent  chain  not  primarily  to  obtain 
increased  revenues,  but  rather  from  fear  of  reduced  revenues  if  he 
fails  to  comply. 

Fears  of  loss  of  revenue  in  other  B  &  K  situations  if  its  requirements  in  the  loop 
were  not  met  were  expressed  by  representatives  of  two  of  these  defendants  [major 
distributors]  in  conversation  with  other  exhibitors. ^^ 

"  United  States  v.  Barney  Balaban,  et  al.,  op.  cit. 


44  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

The  curious  conflicts  of  interest  within  the  industry  caused  by  the 
question  of  unfair  protection  have  resulted  in  a  queer  half-conviction 
on  the  part  of  even  those  using  the  practice  that  it  might  be  better  all 
around  if  equitable  clearance  and  zoning  schedules  generally  applicable 
throughout  the  industry  might  be  developed.  The  establishment  of 
equitable  protection  arrangements,  while  it  has  an  easy  sound,  is  most 
difficult  of  attainment.  Large  theater  investments  have  in  many 
cases  been  made  on  the  basis  of  existing  clearance  arrangements.  The 
question  as  to  whether  these  clearances  are  now  equitable  is  likely  to 
be  considered  somewhat  beside  the  point  when  a  change  may  vastly 
depreciate  values.  Nevertheless,  efforts  have  been  made  by  the 
industry  to  rationalize  the  clearance  system. 

Discussions  which  were  intended  to  lead  to  uniform  clearance  and 
zoning  schedules  were  inaugurated  in  about  IQSO"  through  the  film 
boards  of  trade.  These  film  boards  of  trade  represent  the  local  organ- 
izations of  the  major  distributors  in  each  of  the  key  cities.  Exhibitors 
and  distributors  conferred  on  the  establishment  of  these  schedules. 
It  was  intended  that  each  theater  in  an  exchange  area  would  be 
allotted  a  definite  playing  position,  and  that  all  distributors  would 
adhere  to  the  schedule  adopted.  Uniform  clearance  and  zoning 
schedules  were  set  up  for  about  10  exchange  areas  for  the  1930-31 
season.  However,  in  1  of  these  territories,  an  independent  exhib- 
itor, feeling  that  the  schedules  discriminated  against  him,  instituted 
legal  action  under  the  antitrust  statutes.  The  court  declared  the  plan 
to  be  illegal  under  the  Sherman  Act,  and  it  was  abandoned. ^^ 

The  establishment  of  uniform  schedules  was  again  attempted  under 
the  N.  R.  A.  Code  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry.  Clearance  and 
zoning  boards,  consisting  of  representatives  of  distributors  and  exhib- 
itors, were  set  up  in  each  of  31  exchange  cities.  However,  only  1 
major  schedule  was  approved  during  the  life  of  the  code — ^that  for  the 
Los  Angeles  territory — and  in  this  case  a  number  of  the  protests  were 
outstanding  at  the  time  of  approval.  Nevertheless,  the  local  clearance 
and  zoning  boards  considered  875  individual  complaints  of  inequitable 
protection  arrangements   and  in  many  of  these  relief  was  ordered. 

No  further  attempts  to  set  up  uniform  schedules  have  been  made 
since  invalidation  of  the  code.  However,  it  must  be  noted  that  exist- 
ing protection  arrangements  with  respect  to  any  theater  are  sub- 
stantially the  same  for  all  major  distributors. 

The  subject  of  unfair  clearance  is  recognized  in  section  VIII  of  the 
recent  consent  decree  signed  by  the  five  major  companies.  It  is 
stipulated  that  the  reasonableness  of  the  protection  applicable  to  an 
exhibitor's  theater  shall  be  subject  to  arbitration.  With  certain 
restrictions  the  question  of  the  run  to  be  enjoyed  by  a  theater  is  also 
subject  to  arbitration  under  the  consent  decree.  The  provisions  of 
the  consent  decree  are  discussed  in  greater  detail  in  appendix  III. 

Presumably,  the  exhibitor  subject  to  unfair  clearance  can  bring  a 
successful  action  under  the  antitrust  laws,  alleging  arbitrary  and 
concerted  action  to  limit  competition  and  injure  his  business.  As  in 
the  case  of  overbuying,  the  principal  difficulty  is  in  determining 
whether  the  particular  conditions  obtaining  have  resulted  from  the 
complex  economic  forces  involved  or  from  an  express  intent  to  exploit 
unfairly  the  advantage  of  greater  buying  power.  It  must  be  agreed 
that  in  any  particular  situation,  even  with  all  the  facts,  it  is  most 

3i  Youngclaus  v.  Omaha  Film  Board  of  Trade,  60F  (2d)  538,  July  2,  1932. 


CONCENTRATION  OP  ECONOMIC  POWER  45 

difficult  to  establish  exactly  what  equitable  protection  should  be. 
The  consumer  generally  lacks  such  resources,  and  his  protection  from 
the  effects  of  unfair  clearance  must  come  principally  from  the  forces 
of  competition. 

The  clearance  developed  between  a  number  of  theaters,  wholly 
independent  of  affiliation  with  other  theaters  or  with  distributors,  and 
competing  with  each  other  for  ffims  and  protection  terms,  is  likely  to 
approximate  the  conditions  most  desirable  from  the  consumer  stand- 
point. Where  none  of  these  elements  is  in  a  position  to  exact  un- 
warranted profits  at  the  expense  of  his  competitors  or  the  consumer, 
the  consumer's  interests  are  probably  well  protected.  It  is  when 
large  numbers  of  theaters  are  joined  together  into  a  single  bargaining 
unit  that  unfair  clearance  is  likely  to  develop.  It  is  apparent  that 
the  problems  arising  from  unfair  clearance  and  zoning,  like  those 
developing  from  overbuying,  are  almost  wholly  a  result  of  large-scale 
combination  of  interests  in  the  exhibition  field. 

UNFAIRLY    SPECIFIED    ADMISSION    PRICES 

As  mentioned  in  the  preceding  section,  minimum  admission  prices 
are  specified  in  each  exhibition  contract  and  constitute  an  important 
feature  of  the  license  agreement.  Inserted  originally  for  the  protec- 
tion of  the  distributor,  admission  prices,  like  clearance  and  zoning 
restrictions,  have  in  some  cases  been  converted  by  strong  exhibition 
interests  into  a  weapon  against  weaker  competitors.  This  power  has 
resulted  in  the  setting  of  minimum  admission  prices  in  the  contracts 
of  subsequent-run  exhibitors  at  higher  levels  than  warranted  by  the 
clearance  and  zoning  restrictions  negotiated.  The  effects  of  this 
practice  are,  of  course,  identical  with  those  of, unfairly  extended 
clearance  and  zoning  and  are  equally  vicious  from  the  consumer 
standpoint. 

An  interesting  illustration  involves  the  Interstate  Circuit  and  the 
Texas  Consolidated  Theaters,  both  affiliated  with  Paramount.^* 
Through  ownership  of  about  131  theaters,  about  half  of  which  are 
first-run  theaters  (there  are  1,073  theaters  in  operation  in  Texas  and 
New  Mexico  at  present) ^^  these  two  circuits  dominate  exhibition  in 
Texas  and  New  Mexico,^*  and  have  been  successful  in  dictating  to  the 
various  distributors  the  terms  at  which  the  latter  may  license  films 
to  independents. 

The  following  letter  was  sent  by  Interstate  to  each  of  the  major 
distributors: 

Gentlemen:  On  April  25th  the  writer  notified  you  that  in  purchasing  product 
for  the  coming  season  34-35,  it  would  be  necessary  for  all  distributors  to  take  into 
consideration  in  the  sale  of  subsequent  runs  that  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  will  not 
agree  to  purchase  produce  to  be  exhibited  in  its  "A"  theaters  at  a  price  of  40 
cents  or  more  for  night  admission,  unless  distributors  agree  that  in  selling  their 
product  to  subsequent  runs,  that  this  "A"  product  will  never  be  exhibited  at  any 
time  or  in  any  theater  at  a  smaller  admission  price  than  25  cents  for  adults  in 
the  evening. 

In  addition  to  this  price  restWctjion,  we  also  request  that  on  "A"  pictures  which 
are  exhibited  at  a  night  admission  price  of  40  cents  or  more — they  shall  never  be 
exhibited  in  conjunction  with  another  feature  picture  under  the  so-called  policy 
of  double-features. 

«  U.  S.  V.  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  et  al.,  Equity  No.  3736-992,  1938. 

"  1940  Motion  Picture  Yearbook. 

3'  Their  domination  in  the  cities  where  their  theaters  are  located  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  at  the  time 
of  the  contracts  in  question,  Interstate  and  Consolidated  each  contributed  more  than  74  percent  of  all  the 
license  fees  paid  by  motion  picture  theaters  in  their  territories.  (Opinion,  Supreme  Court  of  the  United 
States,'  Nos.  269,  270,  p.  3.) 


4g  CONCENTRATION  OF  EiCX)NOMIC  POWER 

At  this  time  the  writer  desires  to  again  remind  you  of  these  restrictions  due  to 
the  fact  that  there  may  be  some  delay  in  consummating  all  our  feature  film  deals 
for  the  coming  season,  and  it  is  imperative  that  in  your  negotiations  that  you 
afford  us  this  clearance. 

In  the  event  that  a  distributor  sees  fit  to  sell  his  product  to  subsequent  runs 
in  violation  of  this  request,  it  definitely  means  that  we  cannot  negotiate  for  his 
product  to  be  exhibited  in  our  "A"  theaters  at  top  admission  prices. 

We,  naturally,  in  purchasing  subsequent  runs  from  the  distributors  in  certain 
of  our  cities,  must  necessarily  eliminate  double  featuring  and  maintain  the  maxi- 
mum 25  cent  admission  price,  which  we  are  willing  to  do. 

Right  at  this  time  the  writer  wishes  to  call  your  attention  to  the  Rio  Grande 
Valley  situation.  We  must  insist  that  all  pictures  exhibited  in  our  "A"  theaters 
at  a  maximum  night  admission  price  of  35  cents  must  also  be  restricted  to  subse- 
quent runs  in  the  Valley  at  25  cents.  Regardless  of  the  number  of  days  which 
may  intervene,  we  feel  that  in  exploiting  and  selling  the  distributors'  product, 
that  subsequent  runs  should  be  restricted  to  at  least  a  25  cent  admission  scale. 

The  writer  will  appreciate  your  acknowledging  your  complete  understanding 
of  this  letter. 

Sincerely, 

(Signed;     R.  J.  G'Donnell.s* 

Conferences  between  the  Circuit  and  the  distributors  resulted  in  the 
latter's  agreement  to  impose  the  restrictions  outhned. 

Prior  to  the  1934-35  season,  subsequent-run  exhibition  contracts 
generally  provided  for  a  minimum  admission  price  of  15  cents,  in  some 
cases  10  cents.  The  new  price  restrictions  thus  represented  a  large 
increase.  In  those  low-income  areas  where  the  independent  exhibitors 
could  not  meet  the  new  restrictions,  the  members  of  the  community 
were  furnished  with  only  the  poorer  products  of  the  industry.  The 
pictures  denied  the  theaters  with  a  lesser  admission  price  were  played 
at  the  first-run  theaters  with  admission  prices  of  40  cents  or  more, 
and  those  patrons  who  formerly  waited  for  subsequent  runs  could, 
after  the  change,  see  desirable  pictures  only  at  first-run  theaters. 
Attendance  was  thus  diverted  from  the  subsequent-run  theaters  to 
Interstate's  first-run  theaters,  and  the  income  of  the  former  was 
reduced. 

How  the  process  was  viewed  by  an  independent  exhibitor  in  this 
territory,  as  well  as  the  close  connection  between  clearance  and  admis- 
sion price,  is  illustrated  by  the  following  testimony  at  a  congressional 
hearing. 

I  have  here  the  clearance  schedule  for  the  Interstate  Circuit  in  Texas.  It  is 
written  by  the  Interstate  people,  also  their  affiliated  Texas  Consolidated,  covering 
some  of  the  smaller  towns,  and  it  is  laid  down  by  all  of  the  film  companies,  who 
abide  by  it.  It  lays  down  the  rules  that  they  expect  to  have  followed,  regarding 
the  clearance  of  their  theaters     *     *     *. 

If  you  will  notice  this,  there  is  a  provision  that  a  neighborhood  theater  in  Dallas 
*  *  *  which  charges  25  cents,  shall  wait  90  days  after  the  downtown  first 
run,  before  it  can  get  its  picture  *  *  *.  If  the  charge  is  20  cents,  it  must 
wait  120  days.  So,  there  is  the  place  where  the  control  of  prices  comes  in,  because 
if  I  am  running  the  25-cent  theater  and  elect  or  choose  to  reduce  my  admission 
price  to  20  cents,  I  automatically  force  myself  back  30  days  further  in  clearance. 
My  people  must  wait  4  months  instead  of  3  months  after  the  picture  has  been 
shown  downtown  before  they  can  see  it.  Naturally  that  afi"ects  my  box  office. 
Naturally  that  drives  away  some  customers.  I  have  to  figure  for  myself  as  to 
whether  the  reduction  in  price  will  bring  me  more  customers  than  the  lengthening 
of  the  time,  the  older  the  age  of  the  picture,'will  lose  me  customers     *     *     *.*" 

This  particular  case  is  especially  interesting  as  showing  that  one  of  the 
major  companies  was  successful  in  securing  the  cooperation  of  the 

"  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  el  nl.  v.  The  United  State*  Of  America  (No.  269),  appeals  from  the  District  Court 
■of  the  United  States  for  the  Northern  District  of  Texas,  February  13,  1939. 
*»  Hearings,  House  of  Representatives,  pursuant  to  S.  280,  testimony  H.  A.  Cole,  p.  387. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  47 

•other  large  distributors  in  inaugurating  a  radical  change  in  practice — 
a  change,  by  the  way,  which  they  felt  was  counter  to  their  own  best 
interests.  Universal's  branch  manager,  in  forwarding  the  letter 
quoted  above  to  his  home  office,  wrote: 

I  am  sure  this  will  give  you  some  idea  as  to  how  tough  these  fellows  expect  to 
be  in  the  Dallas  territory,  and  it  looks  to  me  like  a  sales  policy  that  should  be 
"nipped  in  the  bud"  in  New  York  for  after  all,  a  policy  of  this  sort  is  extremely 
dangerous  to  everyone  concerned  and  cannot  help,  in  the  long  run,  but  cost  us 
all  plenty  of  money. 

R-K-O's  branch  manager,  in  forwarding  the  same  letter  to  his  home 
office,  wrote: 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  this  letter  requests  us  to  set  up  a  definite  sales  policy  as 
outlined  by  them,  I  would  appreciate  your  advising  me  if  under  our  national  sales 
policy,  we  would  be  within  our  rights  to  agree  to  any  such  set-up  even  if  we  agreed 
with  tliem.  They  are  automatically  trying  to  set  up  a  model  arrangement  for  the 
United  States  without  giving  us  anything  to  say  about  it. 

Metro's  branch  manager  wrote  to  his  home  office: 
In  my  opinion  Bob  is  making  some  unfair  demands,  imposing  conditions  on  us 
of  which  he  is  a  flagrant  violator.     This  has  particular  reference  to  the  fifth  para- 
graph of  his  letter,  as  he  is  playing  double  features  in  Ft.  Worth,  San  Antonio,  and 
plenty  of  other  situations.^' 

The  Supreme  Court  in  its  opinion  found  that  the  activities  outlined 
were  the  result  of  an  agreement  which  "constituted  a  combination  and 
conspiracy  in  restraint  of  interstate  commerce  in  violation  of  the 
Sherman  Act."" 

In  this  particular  case  a  clear-cut  decision  against  the  practice, 
endorsed  by  the  Supreme  Court,  was  obtained.  However,  in  this 
instance  there  was  clear  and  incontrovertible  evidence  that  admis- 
sion prices  were  deliberately  set  to  restrict  competition  from  sub- 
sequent-run exhibitors.  In  many  other  cases  it  will  be  uncertain 
whether  an  equivalent  result  has  not  been  achieved  by  indirect  means. 

Other  Practices  Affecting  Relationships  Between  Exhibitors 

Various  means  have  been  indicated  whereby  a  powerful  exliibitor 
may  limit  the  competition  of  a  less  powerful  opponent  or  even  drive 
him  from  business.  However,  in  many  cases  it  may  not  even  be  neces- 
sary to  use  methods  which  tend  to  place  the  competitor's  business  on 
an  unprofitable  basis.  The  mere  threat  of  employment  of  one  or  more 
of  these  devices  where  the  smaller  exhibitor  has  the  certain  knowledge 
that  the  power  to  carry  out  the  threat  is  available  may  provide  a 
sufficient  inducement  to  the  small  exhibitor  to  relinquish  part  or  all 
of  his  exhibition  interests  to  the  more  powerful  competitor. 

Other  practices  may  be  used  to  the  same  effect.  The  larger  ex- 
hibitor may  threaten  to  acquire  a  competing  theater  or  he  may 
actually  acquire  such  a  theater  and  operate  it  at  a  loss  until  the  smaller 
exhibitor  is  forced  to  meet  his  terms.     The  variety  of  means  which 

^1  17.  S.  V.  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  et  al.,  op.  cit, 

*'  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.  v.  U.  S.,  op  cit. 

"•  •  *  the  distributor  appellants  agreed  and  conspired  amotig  themselves  to  take  uniform  action  upon 
the  proposals  made  by  Interstate  •  •  •  that  they  carried  out  the  agreement  by  imposing  the  restrictions 
upon  their  subsequent-run  licensees  in  those  cities,  causing  some  of  them  to  increase  their  admission  price 
to  25  cents  •  •  *  thattheeffectof  the  restrictions  upon 'low-income  members  of  the  community' patron- 
izing the  theaters  of  these  exhibitors  was  to  withold  from  them  altogether  the  'best  entertainment  furnished 
by  the  motion  picture  industry;'  and  that  the  restrictions  operated  to  increase  the  income  of  the  distributors 
and  of  Interstate  and  to  deflect  attendance  from  later -run  exhibitors  who  yielded  to  the  restrictions  to  the 
first-run  theaters  of  Interstate  •  •  •  The  court  concluded  *  •  •  the  agreement  •  •  *  consti- 
tuted a  combination  and  conspiracy  in  restraint  of  interstate  commerce  in  violation  of  the  Sherman  Act." 
<n)id.) 


48  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

may  be  employed  in  this  type  of  situation  are  illustrated  in  a  com- 
plaint instituted  against  a  powerful  independent  exhibitor  chain.  The 
complaint  states  in  part: 

By  reason  of  the  control  by  defendant  exhibitors  of  the  most  desirable  motion 
pictures  as  hereinbefore  set  forth,  defendant  exhibitors  have  been  able  practically 
to  eliminate  the  competition  of  independent  exhibitors  in  the  Crescent  towns. 
Independent  exhibitors  have  been  induced  to  sell  their  theaters  to  defendant 
exhibitors  under  the  threat,  express  or  implied,  that  if  they  refused  to  sell,  defend- 
ant exhibitors  would  open  competing  theaters  in  the  same  town  and  prevent 
the  independent  exhibitor  from  procuring  desirable  pictures.  In  a  number  of 
instances,  independent  exhibitors  attempting  to  compete  with  defendant  exhibitors 
have  found  it  impossible  to  procure  sufficient  pictures  to  keep  their  theaters  in 
operation.  In  addition,  defendant  exhibitors  have  lowered  their  prices,  giving 
away  large  sums  of  money  as  prizes,  and  operated  some  of  their  theaters  at  a  loss 
with  the  purpose  and  effect  of  driving  their  competitors  out  of  business  and  giving 
defendant  exhibitors  a  monopoly  in  the  exhibition  of  motion  pictures  in  the  area 
in  which  they  operate.  By  the  use  of  such  tactics  defendant  exhibitors  have 
forced  a  large  number  of  independent  exhibitors  in  the  States  of  Tennessee,  Ken- 
tvicky,  Alabama,  Mississippi,  and  Arkansas  out  of  the  motion-picture  business 
and,  unless  restrained  and  enjoined  by  this  court,  will  continue  to  do  so  in  the 
future  until  they  have  complete  control  of  the  motion  picture  exhibition  business 
in  the  area  in  which  they  operate.''^ 

The  bill  of  particulars  stated,  among  others,  26  instances  in  which 
the  chains  took  over  or  closed  out  small  independent  theaters  during  a 
period  of  5  years. 

A  second  case,  while  not  strictly  concerned  with  the  treatment  of 
an  exhibitor  by  a  more  powerful  competitor,  nevertheless  illustrates 
how  domination  of  an  exhibition  territory  may  be  used.  The  case 
concerns  the  Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation,  the  exhibition  outlet  of 
Paramount  in  Chicago. 

The  Oriental  Theatre  in  Chicago  was  constructed,  as  part  of  a 
larger  project,  expressly  for  first-run  exhibition  of  motion  pictures. 
Before  the  building  was  completed,  the  Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation, 
on  August  25,  1924,  executed  a  lease  for  the  building,  to  run  for  50 
years  at  a  rental  of  $327,000  per  year.  It  was  specifically  provided  in 
the  agreement  that  the  lease  might  not  be  reassigned  to  any  corpora- 
tion having  capital  and  surplus  of  less  than  $1,000,000  at  the  time  of 
assignment. 

On  February  29,  1932,  John  Balaban,  Barney  Balaban,  and  Sam 
Katz,  representing  the  Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation,  formed  the 
Oriental  Theatre  Co.  This  company  had  a  capital  and  surplus  of 
$1,013,132.97,  of  which  $1,013,020.81  consisted  of  accounts  receivable 
from  the  Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation.  The  lease  for  the  Oriental 
Theatre  was  assigned  to  this  corporation  on  March  5,  1932.  Five 
days  later  the  stockholders  of  the  Oriental  Theatre  Co.  met  and 
declared  a  dividend  of  $903,485.21. 

This  maneuver  was  preliminary  to  a  demand  in  October  or  Novem- 
ber 1932  by  the  attorney  representing  both  the  Balaban  &  Katz 
Corporation  and  the  Oriental  Theatre  Co.  that  the  owners  of  the 
building  reduce  the  amount  of  the  rental  for  the  theater.  Since  the 
Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation  controlled  the  Chicago  exhibition  field, 
the  owners  recognized  the  inevitable,  and  on  December  14,  1932, 
agreed  to  a  reduction  in  the  rental  to  $200,000  per  year.  In  July 
or  August  1935  a  request  for  a  further  reduction  in  rental  was  made, 
but  this  was  not  granted.    Finally,  after  some  intervening  negotiations,. 

"  United  States  v.  Crescent  Amusement  Company,  Inc.,  et  al.,  in  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States- 
tor  the  Middle  District  of  Tennessee,  Nashville  division,  complaint,  civil  action  No.  54,  filed  August  11,  1939. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  49 

the  Oriental  Theatre  Co.  defaulted  on  the  rent  and  discontinued  oper- 
ation of  the  theater  on  May  26,  1938.  As  a  consequence  of  this 
action,  the  lease  was  canceled  on  September  22,  1938. 

At  this  time  Balaban  &  Katz  offered  to  lease  the  theater  for  $125,000 
per  year,  with  a  percentage  of  any  profits  made  above  a  certain  figure.'** 
When  this  offer  was  refused,  the  owners  were  informed  by  the  repre- 
sentatives of  Balaban  &  Katz  conducting  the  negotiations  that  they 
might  as  well  lease  to  B.  &  K.  since  "they  are  the  only  people  that 
can  get  pictures  for  the  house."  This  statement  appeared  justified, 
since  negotiations  with  a  number  of  independent  exhibitors  for  oper- 
ation of  the  house  were  unsuccessful.  After  examination  of  the 
possibilities,  each  of  these  concluded  that  they  would  be  unable  to 
secure  sufficient  first-quality  prior-run  product  to  make  the  operation 
of  the  theater  successful.  Finally,  the  theater  was  leased  to  an 
unaffiliated  exhibitor  for  25  years,  commencing  November  1,  1938, 
on  percentage  terms  with  a  guaranteed  rental  of  $150,000  a  year 
after  the  first  2  years. 

This  case  was  summarized  by  the  Government  as  follows: 

The  theater  was  built  and  opened  as  a  first-run  house  under  B.  &  K.  manage- 
ment, at  a  rental  of  $327,000  a  year.  After  6  years  of  such  operation,  it  was 
assigned  to  a  subsidiary  without  financial  responsibihty  as  a  preliminary  to 
negotiations  which  reduced  the  rental  to  $200,000  a  year.  B.  &  K.  then  de- 
faulted again  shortly  after  the  new  lease  was  made,  finally  closed  the  theater, 
and  then  offered  to  lease  it  again  for  $125,000  a  year.  B.  &  K.  could  default 
the  lease  and  close  the  theater  without  having  to  consider  the  possibility  of  first- 
run  competition  from  that  theater  in  other  hands  only  because  it  controlled  the 
supply  of  first-run  pictures  necessary  to  operate  that  theater  on  the  policy  for 
which  it  was  built.  In  so  doing,  it  ruthlessly  depreciated  the  investment  repre- 
sented by  that  theater  in  a  manner  which  the  owners  were  helpless  to  combat.** 

**  United  States  v.  Barney  Balahan  et  ah,  op.  cit.  For  purposes  of  compari.son  the  figure  agreed  upon 
in  the  Loew  ."i-year  franchise  as  the  rental  assigned  to  the  Roosevelt  Theatre  in  Chicago,  owned  by  the 
B.  &  K.  Corporation,  in  computing  film  rentals  on  percentage  pictures  was  $188,295.64  per  year.  Seating 
capacity  of  the  Oriental  was  3,800  as  against  1,540  for  the  Roosevelt. 

"  Ibid. 


CHAPTER  III 

OBSERVATIONS 


CHAPTER  III 

OBSERVATIONS 

The  production  and  distribution  branches  of  the  motion  picture 
industry  are  domhiated  by  five  large  companies.  These  are  flanked 
by  three  satelhte  organizations  unable  in  their  own  economic  interests 
to  oppose  the  policies  of  the  controlling  five. 

It  has  been  made  extremely  difhcult,  if  not  impossible,  for  important 
new  competition  to  enter  production  or  distribution.  The  present 
companies  tlirough  contract  agreements  control  the  motion  picture 
players  and  directors  of  established  reputation,  as  well  as  other  persons 
of  high  technical  ability.  Production  personnel  and  production  equip- 
ment may  be  jointly  used  through  mutual  loans.  Facilities  are  not 
generally  available  to  others  on  these  terms. 

The  control  of  production  and  distribution  by  these  companies  is 
confirmed  by  their  ownership  of  a  most  important  segment  of  the 
motion  picture  theaters  of  the  United  States.  A  pretentious  inde- 
pendent production  in  order  to  be  profitable  must  be  shown  in  at 
least  some  of  these  theaters,  and  in  general  this  can  be  achieved  only 
by  entering  into  a  distribution  contract  with  one  of  the  major  com- 
panies. This  fact  makes  it  extremely  difficult  to  finance  any  inde- 
pendent production  unless  such  arrangements  have  already  been  made. 

In  their  relationships  with  exhibitors  these  companies  have  demon- 
strated similarity  in  policy  and  action.  Various  practices  have  been 
developed  to  maintain  their  control  over  this  field  and  to  render  it 
profitable.  Where  competition  has  proved  counter  to  the  joint  in- 
terests of  these  companies,  cooperation  has  been  substituted.  Many 
of  the  practices  initiated  and  perpetuated  by  these  companies  must 
be  considered  definitely  inimical  to  the  interests  of  the  consumer. 

The  motion  picture  industry  is  not  imique  in  the  sense  that  it  is 
dominated  by  a  few  large  companies.  An  even  higher  degree  of  con- 
centration may  be  found  in  some  other  industries.  But  in  many  of 
these  industries  it  can  be  demonstrated  that  combination  has  resulted 
in  real  economic  benefits  to  the  consumer.  It  is,  therefore,  pertinent 
to  inquire  what  economic  advantages  have  accrued  to  the  consumer 
from  the  degree  of  concentration  which  exists  in  the  production  and 
distribution  branches  of  the  motion  picture  industry  today. 

A  full  and  adequate  discussion  of  this  question  would  require 
information  which  is  not  available  to  the  authors  of  this  rep'ort. 
However,  a  few  significant  items  may  be  considered.  So  far  as  pro- 
duction is  concerned,  the  question  to  be  answered  is  whether  a  larger 
number  of  producing  units,  each  making  a  smaller  number  of  pictures, 
would  increase  unit  costs  of  production  or  lower  the  standard  of  film 
entertainment. 

In  this  connection  the  experience  of  the  United  Artists  Corporation 
is  perhaps  suggestive.  The  pictures  distributed  by  this  company 
almost  uniformly  meet  a  high  standard  of  quality.     Moreover,  the 

286782— 41— Xo.  43 5  53 


54  COXCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

number  of  pictures  produced  each  year  is  not  large.  In  the 
1930  and  1931  -seasons  this  company  released  13  and  14  features, 
respectively;  in  the  1937  season  the  number  was  16.  Beyond  this, -it 
may  be  pointed  out  that  most  of  the  productions  distributed  by  the 
United  Artists  Corporation  are  carried  through  by  completely  separate 
and  individual  producing  organizations. 

Wliile  this  example  is  far  from  conclusive,  since  manj^  important 
factors  have  been  omitted  from  consideration,  it  nevertheless  suggests 
that  efficiency  in  production  may  perhaps  be  achieved  on  a  much 
smaller  number  of  pictures  than  the  40,  50,  or  60  produced  annually 
by  each  of  the  major  companies. 

It  is  not  irrelevant  in  this  connection  to  point  out  that  Hollywood 
has  been  the  target  of  repeated  charges  of  extravagance  and  economic 
waste.  It  is  unnecessary  to  detail  these  here.  But  inefficiency  or 
extravagance  of  the  type  ordinarily  alleged  is  seldom  possible  except 
in  very  large  organizations.  One  must  admit  the  possibility,  then, 
that  unit  costs  of  production  might  actually  be  less  if  the  producing 
companies  were  of  smaller  average  size. 

In  the  distribution  branch  of  the  industr}'^,  it  must  be  admitted 
without  question  that  there  is  a  real  cost  advantage  in  having  each 
distributor  handle  as  large  a  number  of  pictures  as  possible.  An 
increase  in  the  number  of  distributing  organizations  would  un- 
doubtedly result  in  duplication  of  personnel  and  facilities.  However, 
distribution  costs  are  in  general  a  rather  small  factor  in  this  industry, 
and  they  do  not  increase  in  direct  ratio  as  the  number  of  prints  released 
by  each  distributor  is  reduced. 

Certain  entries  must  be  made  on  the  other  side  of  the  ledger.  The 
concentration  existing  in  the  production  and  distribution  branches 
of  the  industry  has  permitted  the  concerted  use  of  practices  which 
insure  a  return  from  the  consumer  on  all  products,  regardless  of  quality. 
The  large  business  units  existing  are  generally  unresponsive  to  con- 
sumer pressure,  and  the  economic  forces  tending  to  produce  steady 
improvement  of  the  goods  offered  have  to  some  extent  been  vitiated. 

For  the  production  and  distribution  branches  of  the  industry 
together,  then,  there  is  no  strong  evidence  to  show  that  the  existing 
degree  of  concentration  has  resulted  in  economic  savings  for  the 
consumer.  The  motion  picture  industry  may  be  contrasted  in  this 
respect  with  the  manufacture  of  automobiles.  Here  there  is  no 
question  but  that  a  high  degree  of  integration  exists.  But  it  is 
equally  true  that  this  integration  has  been  followed  both  by  substan- 
tWl  and  persistent  reductions  in  unit  costs  of  production  and  by  steady 
improvements  in  quality. 

Concentration  is  likewise  an  important  factor  in  the  exhibition 
branch  of  the  industry.  Individual  theaters  have  been  combined 
mider  comrnon  ownership  and  welded  into  huge  chains  of  enormous 
pooled  buyii.L,  power.  The  economic  strength  of  these  chains  has 
been  used  to  enhance  their  profits  and  extend  their  sway  nt  the  expense 
of  consumers  and  the  smaller  elements  in  the  industry.  Various  prac- 
tices have  been  developed  and  used  when  necessary  to  destroy  the 
possibility  of  successful  competition.  Overbuying  of  films,  unfair 
and  unwarranted  clearance  imd  zoning  agreements,  and  a  variety  of 
other  pract'-^es  have  been  actively  employed  in  this  way. 

Thise  practice?,  represent  more,  however,  than  a  simple  abuse  of  the 
power  conferred  by  size.     They  form  a  p.a-t  of  the  larger  problem  of 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  55 

local  monopoly  in  the  exhibition  field.  Distributors  of  motion  pic- 
tures frequently  describe  themselves  as  wholesalers.  By  inference 
"•ihibitors  are  to  be  likened  to  retailers.  On  closer  examination, 
however,  the  parallel  vanishes.  Virtually  any  retail  article  sold  at  a 
nominal  price  may  be  marketed  in  a  variety  of  retail  outlets.  Motion 
pictures,  on  the  other  hand,  can  be  offered  to  the  public  only  in  motion 
picture  theaters.  Each  -theater  represents  a  large  investment  and 
unlike  the  usual  retail  establishment  it  can  be  used  only  for  a  single 
specialized  purpose. 

Control  of  all  theaters  in  a  locality,  therefore,  gives  the  possessor 
the  means  of  monopoly.  A  retail  outlet  of  one  type  may  in  most 
cases  be  transformed  almost  overnight  to  an  outlet  for  an  entirely 
different  commodity.  An  additional  outlet  for  motion  picture  exhibi- 
tion, on  the  other  hand,  cannot  be  found  so  readily.  Control  of  all 
theaters  in  an  area  is  as  surely  a  monopoly  as  a  local  electric  power  or 
telephone  company.  Competition  is  absent  simply  because  other 
facilities  for  the  business  are  not  available.  The  major  difference  is 
that  the  charges  made  by  utilities  are  limited  by  public  regulation. 

It  is  assumed  that  whoever  may  wish  to  do  so  is  free  to  construct  a 
new  theater.  It  may  be  said,  therefore,  that  there  can  be  no  local 
monopoly  of  exhibition  since  inordinate  profits  would  draw  compe- 
tition.    Let  us  examine  this  prospect  more  closely. 

It  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  the  construction  of  a  new 
theater  entails  a  considerable  investment  in  property  which  will  have 
but  one  use  and  which  will  be  of  little  value  if  not  put  to  that  use. 
An  investor  would  be  foolish  indeed  if  he  did  not  examine  the  risks 
before  embarking  on  such  a  prospect.  It  may  be  assumed,  then,  that 
the  investor  before  constructing  a  new  theater  will  insure  that  when 
it  is  completed  an  adequate  supply  of  suitable  pictures  will  be  available 
for  use.  How  frequently  will  this  condition  be  satisfied  in  a  locality 
where  the  control  of  existing  theaters  is  in  the  hands  of  a  large  chain 
exhibition  organization?  Such  organizations  must  feel  secure  indeed 
in  their  local  monopolies  since  in  general  they  have  to  fear  competition 
only  from  organizations  as  powerful  as  themselves.  Especially  secure 
are  the  theater-operating  subsidiaries  of  the  major  producer-distribu- 
tors since  every  dictate  of  self-interest  moves  them  to  cooperate 
rather  than  compete  with  one  another. 

Here  again  one  may  inquire  whether  real  economies  to  the  consumer 
may  not  result  from  chain  operation.  The  most  significant  answer  to 
this  question  is  given  by  the  fact  that  acquisition  of  a  theater  by  a 
chain  is  seldom  followed  by  a  reduction  in  the  charged  admission  price. 
Rather,  the  reverse  has  more  commonly  been  the  case.  The  spread 
of  chain  exhibition  organizations  has  accomplished  a  steady  increase 
in  the  number  of  local  exhibition  monopolies,  the  effect  of  which  has 
been  graduall}^  to'  strip  the  consumer  of  the  protection  formerly 
accorded  him  by  competition. 

Concentration  in  both  production  and  exhibition  has  been  linked 
through  the  five  major  companies  which  operate  in  both  branches  of 
the  industry.  The  activities  of  these  companies  in  each  of  these  fields 
have  been  used  to  extend  their  control  and  enhance  their  profits  in 
the  other.  In  the  exhibition  as  well  as  in  the  production  field,  coop- 
eration has  been  substituted  for  competition  where  this  was  jointly 
advantrgeous,  without  consideration  of  the  interests  of  the  consumer. 
The  theater  interests  of  these  companies  have  been  so  located  as  to- 


55  CONCENTRATION  OP  ECONOMIC  POWER 

provide  a  minimum  degree  of  friction  of  one  with  the  other.  Con- 
flicting interests  have  been  resolved  where  this  seemed  mutually 
desirable  by  simply  pooling  theater  operations. 

It  has  been  stated  that  the  degree  of  concentration  existing  in  the 
motion  picture  industry  is  not  greater  and  in  some  cases  is  less  than 
that  obtaining  in  many  other  important  lines  of  enterprise.  It  may 
be  asked,  then,  why  this  industry  requires  any  special  consideration. 
One  answer  to  this  question  has  been  given  above.  In  some  lines  of 
enterprise,  concentration  confers  cost  advantages  which  in  turn  bene- 
fit the  consumer.  In  the  motion  picture  industry,  on  the  other  hand, 
there  is  reason  to  believe  that  exactly  the  opposite  has  been  the  case. 
In  at  least  one  other  important  aspect  the  motion  picture  industry 
displays  significant  differences. 

The  motion  picture  commenced  as  a  novel  and  pleasing  type  of 
entertainment,  but  it  has  evolved  into  an  important  social  and  cultural 
force.  In  some  senses  it  provides  a  common  denominator  to  the 
feelings  and  aspirations  of  an  entire  people.  Its  importance  must 
then  be  measured  in  terms  other  than  the  conventional  one  of  dollars 
and  cents. 

Readers  of  economic  reports  of  this  type  have  come  to  expect  a 
diagnosis  of  sickness,  to  be  followed  by  the  author's  pet  patent  medi- 
cine for  the  cure  of  all  troubles.  In  the  present  case  the  authors  are 
content  to  indicate  the  cause  without  attempting  to  make  a  sale  on 
some  particular  cure.  However,  one  thing  may  be  definitely  stated. 
Any  remedy  or  solution  to  the  problems  of  the  motion  picture  industry 
in  its  relations  with  the  consuming  public  will  not  be  a  simple  one. 
It  is  a  mistake  to  assume  that  any  such  cure-all  as  "divorcement  of 
exhibition  from  production"  or  "restoration  of  competition  in  the  pro- 
duction field"  or  any  other  single  proposal  will  resolve  all  the  difficul- 
ties of  all  the  elements  with  an  interest  in  this  industry.  Any  single 
step  might  well  ameliorate  the  effects  of  some  of  the  undesirable  prac- 
tices of  the  industry  as  they  affect  the  consumer,  the  exhibitor  or  some 
other  interested  group.  The  motion  picture  industry  exhibits  symp- 
Itoms  which  are  common  to  manytJ^  our  great  enterprises.  Its  prob- 
lems are  part  of  the  larger  problem  of  the  development  and  direction 
of  American  industry.  More  than  anything  else,  perhaps,  intelligent 
and  sympathetic  study  is  indicated. 


APPENDIX  I 

THE  EIGHT  MAJOR  COMPANIES 


APPENDIX  I 

THE  EIGHT  MAJOR  COMPANIES 

The  following  are  brief  sketches  of  the  development  and  integration 
of  the  five  major  prodiicer-distributor-exhibitor  companies  and  the 
three  satellite  producer-distributor  companies. 

The  extent  of  the  financial  holdings  of  these  companies  is  of  neces- 
sity understated.  For  instance,  interests  in  real  estate,  radio,  and 
music  companies  among  others  are  not  included. 

The  material  in  the  skeicnes  is  taken  from  the  amended  and  sup- 
plemental complaint,  November  14,  1940,  U.  S.  v.  Paramount  Pictures, 
et  al.,  civil  action  No.  87,273,  in  the  District  Court  of  the  United 
States  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 

PARAMOUNT    PICTURES,    INC. 

Famous  Players-Lasky  Corporation  was  incorporated  on  July  19, 
1916.  In  1917  twelve  producing  companies  merged  with  it.  At  the 
same  time  the  corporation  integrated  production  and  distribution  by 
acquiring  a  national  distribution  system  through  a  merger  with 
Artcraft  Pictures  Corporation  and  Paramount  Pictures  Corporation. 

In  1919  the  corporation  started  its  theater  acquisition  program.  It 
acquired  stock  interest  in  Southern  Enterprises,  Inc.,  with  135 
theaters  in  the  South;  in  1920  it  acquired  stock  interest  in  New 
England  Theatres.  Inc.,  with  50  New  England  theaters;  in  the  Butter- 
field  Theatre  Circuit  with  70  theaters  in  Michigan  about  1926;  in 
Balaban  &  Katz  w^ith  50  theaters  in  Illinois  at  the  same  time.  Later 
numerous  theaters  in  the  West  and  Middle  West  were  acquired. 

In  April  1927  the  corporate  name  was  changed  to  Paramount 
Famous  Lasky  Corporation,  and  in  April  1930  to  Paramount  Publix 
Corporation.  In  1933  Paramount  Publix  Corporation  was  adjudi- 
cated a  bankrupt  in  the  Federal  District  Court  for  the  Southern  Dis- 
trict of  New  York.  In  June  1935  it  was  reorganized  under  sec.  77B 
of  the  Bankruptcy  Act  under  the  name  of  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc. 

Today  Paramount  operates  63  first-run  metropolitan  and  1,210 
other  theaters,  and  has  exchanges  in  33  key  cities.  It  produces  from 
45  to  60  pictures  annually  and  ordinarily  distributes  each  season  a 
substantial  number  of  features  produced  by  others  for  release  by  it; 
it  produces  an  average  of  45  short  subjects  and  104  news  reels  annually. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $90,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  in  excess  of 
$100,000,000. 

LOEW'S   INCORPORATED 

Loew's  Consolidated  Enterprises,  organized  in  1910  was  succeeded 
in  1911  by  Loew's  Theatrical  Enterprises.  Beginning  in  1911  the 
company,  through  subsidiary  corporations,  extended  its  activities 
in  the  operation  of  theaters  in  New  York  City,  among  other  cities. 
By  1919  it  had  financial  interests  in  approximately  56  theaters. 

,      59 


go  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

In  October  1919  Loew's  Incorporated  was  organized  and  acquired 
all  the  outstanding  stock  of  Loew's  Theatrical  Enterprises.  The 
extent  of  its  theater  business  has  increased  gradually  since. 

In  1920  Loew's  Inc.,  entered  the  production  and  distribution  field 
by  acquiring  the  outstanding  stock  of  Metro  Pictures  Corporation. 
In  1924  Metro  merged  with  Goldwyn  Pictures  Corporation  under  the 
name  of  Metro-Goldwyn  Pictures  Corporation.  As  a  result  of  the 
merger  Loew's  became  the  owner  of  all  of  Metro-Goldwyn's  common 
stock.  About  the  same  time  certain  assets  of  Louis  B.  Mayer  Pic- 
tures, Inc.,  were  turned  over  to  Metro-Goldwyn.  The  business  of 
Metro-Goldwyn  was  subsequently  assumed  by  the  Metro-Goldwyn- 
Mayer  Corporation.  In  December  1937,  the  Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer 
Corporation  ceased  to  do  business  and  its  production  activities  were 
taken  over  by  Loew's  Incorporated. 

Today  Loew's  operates  24  first-run  metropolitan  and  98  other 
theaters  and  has  exchanges  in  31  key  cities.  It  produces  from  40  to 
50  pictures  annually  and  ordinarily  distributes  each  season  a  substan- 
tial number  of  features  produced  by  others  for  release  by  it;  it  produces 
an  average  of  36  shorts  annually. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $150,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  in  excess  of 
$100,000,000. 

TWENTIETH    CENTURY-FOX    FILM    CORPORATION 

On  February  1,  1915,  this  organization  was  incorporated  under  the 
name  of  Fox  Film  Corporation.  In  August  1925  it  acquired  about 
one-third  the  common  stock  of  West  Coast  Theatres,  Inc.,  with 
theaters  in  California  and  other  Western  States.  In  March  1928  it 
purchased  all  the  common  stock  of  Wesco  Corporation,  a  holding 
company  for  theater  operation. 

In  1933  Wesco  went  into  receivership,  but  in  1934  readjusted  its 
capital  structure,  and  the  Chase  National  Bank  of  the  City  of  New 
York  acquired  58  percent  of  its  stock,  the  Fox  Film  Corporation 
retaining  42  percent. 

In  August  1935  the  Chase  Bank  acquired  a  substantial  stock  interest 
in  Twentieth-Century  Pictures,  Inc.,  a  producing  and  distributing 
company,  and  the  name  was  changed  to  Twentieth  Century-Fox  Film 
Corporation.  The  name  of  Wesco  was  changed  to  National  Theatres 
Corporation. 

In  1937  the  corporation  acquired  all  the  common  stock  of  Roxy 
Theatre,  Inc.,  which  owns  Roxy  in  New  York. 

Today  Twentieth  Centnry-Fox  operates  30  first-run  metropolitan 
and  508  other  theaters;  it  has  exchanges  in  31  key  cities.  It  produces 
annually  from  50  to  60  pictures  and  distributes  a  substantial  number 
of  features  produced  by  others  for  release  by  it;  it  produces  an  average 
of  20  short  subjects  and  104  news  reels  annually. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $60,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  about  $50,000,000. 

WARNER    BROTHERS    PICTURES,    INC. 

Warner  Bros,  was  incorporated  in  1923  for  the  purpose  of  producing, 
distributing,  and  exhibiting  motion  pictures.  At  the  time  it  had  no 
theaters,  but  in  December  1924  it  entered  the  exhibition  field  with  one 
theater  in  Youngstown,  Ohio.     In  1925  it  acquired  Vitagraph,  Inc., 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  Ql 

which  operated  34  exchanges  in  the  principal  cities  of  this  country  and 
Canada;  it  also  acquired  two  other  affiliated  companies  operating 
foreign  exchanges. 

In  1925  it  acquired  13  additional  theaters  and  in  December  1928  it 
acquired  the  majority  stock  of  Stanley  Co.  of  America  with  182 
theaters  and  partial  stock  in  other  theater  companies  which  owned  or 
leased  51  theaters  in  the  Middle  Atlantic  States  and  District  of 
Columbia.  Subsequently  it  acquired  theater  interests  in  11  other 
States. 

Warner  Bros,  operates  35  first-run  metropolitan  and  522  other 
theaters;  it  has  exchanges  in  34  cities  in  this  country  and  Canada. 
It  produces  more  than  50  features  each  season  and  ordinarily  dis- 
tributes some  features  each  season  produced  by  others  for  release  by  it. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $150,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  exceeded  $100,000,000. 

RADIO-KEITH-ORPHEUM    CORPORATION 

The  Keith-Albee-Orpheum  Corporation  was  organized  January 
28,  1928.  In  February  1928  it  acquired  all  the  outstanding  stock  of 
the  B.  F.  Keith  Corporation,  with  a  large  number,  of  theaters  in 
the  East,  and  approximately  90  percent  of  the  outstanding  stock  of  the 
Orpheum  Circuit,  Inc.,  with  theaters  in  the  Midwest  and  West.  It 
incorporated  October  25,  1928,  as  Radio-Keith-Orpheum  Corpora- 
tion, after  securing  control  of  Keith-Albee-Orpheum  and  the  cor^- 
trolling  interest  in  other  companies  engaged  in  exhibition,  the  most 
important  ones  being  R-K-0  Proctor  Corporation  (a  New  York 
circuit)  and  R-K-0  Midwest  Corporation  (Ohio  and  Michigan 
theaters) . 

F-B-0  Productions,  Inc.,  the  principal  producing  company  taken 
over  by  R-K-0,  was  later  renamed  R-K-0  Radio  Pictures,  Inc. 
In  January  1931,  it  took  over  the  news  reel  and  other  production 
facilities  of  Pa  the  Exchange,  Inc.,  and  later  those  of  the  Van  Buren 
Corporation. 

On  January  27,  1933,  the  R-K-0  Corporation  went  into  an  equity 
receivership,  and  the  Irving  Trust  Co.  was  appointed  receiver. 
On  June  8,  1934,  R-K-0  Corporation  filed  a  petition  for  reorganization 
under  section  77B  of  the  Bankruptcy  Act  in  the  District  Court  for  the 
Southern  District  of  New  York.  The  Irving  Trust  Co.  was  appointed 
trustee  in  reorganization.  A  plan  of  reorganization  was  approved 
January  17,  1939,  confirmed  April  11,  1939,  and  affirmed  by  the  Cir- 
cuirt  Court  of  Appeals  for  the  Second  Circuit  on  September  8,  1939. 

Today  R-K-0  operates  29  first-run  metropolitan  and   103  other 
theaters;  it  has  exchanges  in  32  cities.     It  produces  over  40  pictures 
annually  and  ordinarily  distributes  a  substantial  number  of  features 
produced  by  others  for  release  by  it;  it  produces  an  average  of  91— 
shorts  and  104  news  reels  annually. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $70,000,000,  and-for  the  fiscal  year 
ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  about  $40,000,000. 

UNITED  ARTISTS  CORPORATION 

United  Artists  was  organized  in  1919  by  a  group  of  producers  for  the 
purpose  of  distributing  the  features  produced  by  its  organizers.  The 
corporation  is  o^vned  by  four  stockholders:  Samuel  Goldwyn,' Mary 
Pickford,  the  estate  of  Douglas  Fairbanks,  and  "Alexander ^vorda. 


Q2  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

It  releases  not  quite  20  pictures  yearly  and  maintains  exchanges  in 
26  cities. 

It  issues  no  public  statement  of  gross  assets  or  business  done.  For 
the  fiscal  year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  over 
$10,000,000. 

COLUMBIA  PICTURES  CORPORATION 

Columbia  was  incorporated  January  10,  1924.  Early  the  following 
year  it  acquired  the  assets  of  C.  B.  C.  Film  Sales  Corporation,  and 
continued  buying  up  various  exchanges  throughout  the  country.  In 
1928  it  acquired,  through  merger,  Screen  Snapshots,  Inc.,  Hall  Room 
Boys  Photoplays,  Inc.,  Starland  Revue,  Inc. — all  short  subjects 
producing  companies.  By  1929  its  distribution  system  was  organized 
on  a  national  scale,  and  in  1930  it  secured  exchanges  in  foreign  coun- 
tries. In  1931  it  secured  50  percent  of  the  capital  stock  of  Screen 
Gems,  Inc.,  producer  of  shorts,  and  in  1937  secured  the  remaining 
50  percent. 

Today  it  produces  from  35  to  55  features  annually  and  ordinarily 
distributes  a  substantial  number  of  features  produced  by  others  for 
release  by  it.  It  produces  an  average  of  61  short  subjects  annually. 
It  operates  32  exchanges  in  key  cities. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $15,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  about  $20,000,000. 

UNIVERSAL  CORPORATION 

Universal  Pictures  Corporation,  formerly  Universal  Film  Manu- 
facturing Co.,  was  incorporated  in  New  York  in  1912.  On  January 
10,  1925,  Universal  Pictures  Co.,  Inc.,  was  formed  and  about  the  same 
time  purchased  the  entire  outstanding  capital  stock  of  Universal 
Pictures  Corporation. 

In  January  1926  Universal  Pictures  Corporation  secured  sub- 
stantial stock  interest  in  Universal  Chain  Theatres  Corporation — 
exhibitors.  In  1928  this  exhibition  corporation  and  its  affiliates 
operated  315  theaters  in  Canada,  the  District  of  Columbia,  and  20 
States,  including  the  Griffith  Amusement  Co.,  with  40  theaters  in 
Oklahoma  and  Texas,  and  the  Schine  chain,  with  90  theaters  in  New 
York  and  Ohio.  Between  1929  and  1931  it  disposed  of  a  substantial 
number  of  theaters.  In  1933  it  went  into  receivership  and  the  remain- 
ing theaters  were  sold  by  the  receiver. 

From  1925  to  1936  Universal  Pictures  Corporation  was  the  produc- 
tion branch  of  Universal  Pictures  Co.,  Inc.  In  December  1936 
Universal  Pictures  Corporation  was  dissolved  and  its  assets  were 
transferred  to  Universal  Pictures  Co.,  Inc.  Universal  Corporation, 
organized  in  April  1936,  acquired  the  controlling  stock  interest  of 
^Universal  Pictures  Co.,  Inc.  (producer),  and  the  Big  U  Film  exchange 
(distributor) . 

Today  Universal  produces  40  to  45  pictures  annually  and  ordinarily 
distributes  each  season  some  features  produced  by  others  for  release 
by  it.  It  distributes  extensively  through  the  Big  U  Film  Exchange, 
Inc.,  and  Universal  Film  Exchanges,  Inc. 

Its  gross  assets  are  approximately  $12,000,000,  and  for  the  fiscal 
year  ended  in  1939  its  consolidated  gross  income  was  about  $20,000,000. 


APPENDIX  II 

THE  MOTION  PICTURE  PRODUCERS  AND 
DISTRIBUTORS  OF  AMERICA,  INC. 

OR 

THE  HAYS  ORGANIZATION 


APPENDIX  II 

THE  MOTION  PICTURE  PRODUCERS  AND  DISTRIBUTORS 
OF  AMERICA,  INC.,  OR  THE  HAYS  ORGANIZATION 

Early  in  the  1920's  there  was  great  pubhc  disapproval  of  a  wave  of 
salacious  films.  Aggravated  by  a  series  of  scandals  involving  motion- 
picture  personalities,  this  indignation  resulted  in  widespread  public 
agitation  for  censorship  of  motion  pictures  both  locally  and  by  the 
Federal  Government.  Considering  censorship  undesirable  in  itself 
and  fearing  such  action  might  be  the  first  step  to  further  governmental 
control,  the  industry  attempted  to  put  its  own  house  in  order.  Thus 
in  1922  it  formed  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  &  Distributors  of 
America,  Inc.  Perhaps  not  solely  because  of  his  abilities  as  an 
administrator,  the  industry  hired  to  head  this  organization  a  promi- 
nent political  figure,  Will  H.  Hays,  then  Postmaster  General  and  chair- 
man of  the  Republican  National  Committee. 

This  organization  successfully  combated  the  censorship  drive  of  the 
period,  primarily  by  voluntary  restraint  in  production.  However, 
the  ma-iy  pictures  narrowly  skirting  the  borderline  of  decency  which 
have  been  released  since  then  vpry  clearly  illustrate  that  the  interest 
of  the  organization  was  not  in  cleaning  up  motion  pictures  from  a  pure 
moral  standpoint;  rather,  it  was  to  keep  motion  picture  entertain- 
ment at  a  level  which  would  not  so  far  violate  the  mores  of  the  time 
that  renewed  censorship  activities  would  come  into  play. 

A  gradual  disregard  of  pledges  following  the  initial  clean-up  finally 
led  to  the  formation  of  the  Legion  of  Decency  early  in  1934  as  a  re- 
ligious crusade  against  immoral  films.  This  was  followed  on  July  1, 
1934,  by  a  new  and  more  stringent  Production  Code  of  Ethics  which 
successfully  resisted  the  renewed  attempt  to  write  censorship  clauses 
into  the  law.  It  was  directed  by  Joseph  I.  Breen,  whose  findings 
were  "subject  to  review  only  on  appeal  to  the  company  presidents  of 
member  companies  in  New  York."  ^ 

Although  the  Hays  organization  was  created  primarily  in  answer 
to  the  threat  of  censon  hip,  it  quite  naturally  extended  its  field  to  resist 
other  activities  which  might  lead  to  control  over  the  industry  by 
Government.  Today  it  is  a  regular  function  of  the  Hays  organization 
to  represent  the  larger  companies  before  State  and  Federal  legislative 
bodies.  Nor  have  the  activities  of  the  organization  been  limited  to  this 
simple  field.  The  interests  of  the  organization  have  spread  thrqilgh 
a  number  of  activities  which  the  large  companies  felt  could  be  profit- 
ably and  legally  entered  into  on  a  cooperative  basis.  The  following 
paragraphs  briefly  outline  some  of  these  activities. 

'  1935-36  Motion  Picture  Almanac,  p.  800. 

65 


QQ  CONCEJS'TRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

PRODUCTION    CODE    ADMINISTRATION 

The  Prpduction  Code  consists  of  a  rather  detailed  statement  of 
undesirable  scenes  or  situations  or  methods  of  production  which  the 
members  of  the  Hays  organization  have  pledged  themselves  to  avoid. 
Since  a  simple  pledge  of  this  kind  is  more  likely  to  be  honored  in  the 
breach  rather  than  the  observance,  a  Production  Code  Administration 
has  been  formed  to  implement  it.  The  Production  Code  Administra- 
tion reviews  all  completed  films  submitted  by  members  or  nonmembers. 
It  will  review  scripts,  but  does  not  give  prior  approval  merely  from 
the  reading  of  a  script. 

Objectionable  material  in  a  photoplay  must  be  removed  before  the 
Hays  office  places  it  seal  of  approval  on  the  film.  The  code  has 
definite  teeth,  in  that  the  members  of  the  Hays  organization  have 
agreed  to  pay  a  $25,000  fine  to  the  organization  for  the  exhibition  in 
any  affiliated  theater  of  any  picture  which  lacks  the  seal  of  approval. 

It  is  evident  that  refusal  of  the  seal  of  approval  to  a  fu'st-class  inde- 
pendent production  would  immediately  make  it  a  financial  failure 
because  it  could  not  be  shown  in  any  of  the  2,800  theaters  controlled 
by  the  large  companies.  It  might  not  even  be  necessary  flatly  to 
refuse  the  seal  of  approval.  Granting  the  seal  might  be  made  con- 
ditional on  the  deletion  of  small  parts  of  the  film  which  nevertheless 
served  to  destroy  the  essential  appeal  of  the  picture. 

It  is  true  that  few  complaints  have  been  made  by  independent  pro- 
ducers regarding  the  activities  of  the  Production  Code  Administration. 
But,  even  granting  that  the  powers  of  the  code  administration  have 
in  every  case  been  wisely  and  equitably  used,  there  remains  a  definite 
question  as  to  whether  such  control  of  the  business  of  potential  or 
prospective  competitors  can  properly  be  lodged  in  the  hands  of  an 
interested  industry  group.  The  motion  picture  industry  has  over  the 
years  consistently  opposed  governmental  censorship  of  films  jargely* 
on  the  grounds  that  the  power  of  censorship  might  not  be  wisely 
exercised.  How  much  more  assurance  is  there  that  this  power  will' 
always  be  wisely  exercised  by  a  nongovernmetal  group? 

ADVERTISING   ADVISORY    COUNCIL 

This  council,  organized  in  1933,  performs  the  same  functions  with 
respect  to  motion  picture  advertising  as  the  Production  Code  Admin- 
istration exercises  with  respect  to  a  photoplay's  content.  Members 
of  the  Hays  organization  are  required  to  use  advertising  approved 
by  the  council  exclusively.  Nonobservance  is  punishable  by  a  fine 
of  from  $1,000  to  $5,000.  '  The  implications  of  the  control  of  advertis- 
ing are  perhaps  less  serious  than  the  censorship  activities,  since  these 
do  not  appear  to  limit  to  the  same  extent  the  activities  of  persons 
outside  the  association. 

TITLE    REGISTRATION    BUREAU 

This  bureau  was  set  up  for  the  purpose  of  registering  motion  picture 
titles  to  avoid  the  unintentional  use  of  similar  or  identical  titles. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC   POWER  57 

THEATER    SERVICE    DEPARTMENT 

This  is  an  affiliated  exhibitors  relations  department.  Among  its 
activities  it  assists  "trade  associations  of  theater  owners  in  develop- 
ing in  constructive  ways  their  own  usefulness  and  service  to  ifee  local 
theater  owners  in  their  own  state  and  zone     *     *     *"  ^         > 

FOREIGN    DEPARTMENT 

Through  this  department,  "the  Association  assists  members  in 
securing  fair  treatment  in  the  distribution  of  American  films  abroad. 
In  the  17  years,  the  Association  has  taken  a  loading  part  in  successful 
negotiations  to  solve  difficulties  due  to.  restrictive  legislation.  The 
department  keeps  member  companies  closely  informed  on  legislative 
and  economic  developments  in  foreign  markets."  ^ 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Among  the  other  activities  are  the  Conservation  Department,  whose 
function  it  is  to  eliminate  fire  hazards  in  film  exchanges;  the  Com- 
munity Service  Department,  whose  function  it  is  to  stimulate  public 
interest  in  and  patronage  of  film^  of  the  higher  type;  the  general 
Counsel,  who  represents  the  organization  before  the  legislative  bodies ; 
the  Legal  Department,  which  is  adviser  to  the  Association  and  its  mem- 
bers; the  Public  Information  Department,  the  Treasury  and  Accounting 
Department;  and  the  Office  of  the  President. 

COPYRIGHT    BUREAU 

The  function  of  this  bureau  is  to  ferret  out  violations  of  copyrights. 
It  is  contended  to  be  separate  from  the  Hays  organization,  but  is 
financed  by  the  same  companies. 

FILM    BOARDS    OF    TRADE 

These  boards  of  trade  were  established  in  various  key  cities  by  and 
for  the  producers  and  distributors. 

The  film  boards  of  trade  undertook  to  settle  disputes  between  exhibitors  and 
chains  of  producers.  Attached  to  each  film  board  of  trade  was  a  credit  committee. 
If  a  credit  committee  reported  adversely  to  an  exhibitor,  all  of  the  member  pro- 
ducers and  distributors  withdrew  their  product  from  the  affected  theater.  The 
Untied  States  v.  First  National  Pictures  et  al.  (282  U.  S.  44)  decreed  that  certain 
acts  of  the  credit  committee  constituted  an  illegal  restraint  of  trade. ■* 

It  is  denied  by  the  Hays  organization  that  there  is  any  connection 
between  it  and  the  film  boards  of  trade,  but  they  are  financed  by 
the  same  organizations  and  both  groups  have  the  same  general  counsel 
and  general  attorney,^ 

ASSOCIATION     OF     MOTION     PICTURE     PRODUCERS     OF    CALIFORNIA,    INC. 

This  is  an  association  of  the  California  producers.  Its  composition 
is  similar  to  that  of  the  Hays  organization.  It  operates  the  Central 
Casting  Bureau,  which  supplies  the  members  of  the  association  with 

»  "Film  Facts,"  published  by  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  New  York, 
1940. 

3  Ibid. 

<  Cit.  from  hearings  before  a  subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on  Interstate  Commerce,  U.  S.  Senate, 
pursuant  to  S.  3012,  "Compulsory  Block-Booking  and  Blind  Selling  in  the  Motion  Picture  Industry," 
74th  Cong.,  Feb.  27  and  28,  193G,  p.  16. 

« Ibid. 


63  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

actors  above  extra  grade,  and  the  Call  Bureau  which  supplies  members 
with  extra  players.     These  services  are  not  supplied  to  nonmembers. 

Officers,  f)iRECTORS,  and  Members  of  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  and 
Distributors  of  America,  Inc.^ 

officers 

President _,-_,. - Will  H.  Hays. 

Secretary . Carl  E.  Milliken. 

Treasurer Frederick  L.  Herron. 

Assistant  treasurer  and  assistant  secretary, George  Borthwick. 

DIRECTORS 

Will  H.  Hays,  Chairman 

Barney  Balaban,  Paramount.  S.  R.  Kent,  Twentieth  Century  Fox. 

Nate  J.  Blumberg,  Universal.  Sol  Lesser,  producer  and  exhibitor. 

Jack  Cohn,  Columbia.  Hal  E.  Roach,  United  Artists. 

Cecil.  B.  de  Mille,  producer.  G.  J.  Schaefer,  United  Artists. 

E.  W.  Hammons,  Education  Pictures.        N.  M.  Schenck,  Loew's. 

E.  B.  Hatrick,  News  of  the  Day.  Maurice  Silverstone. 

Frederick  L.  Herron.  Maj.  A.  Warner,  Vitaphone  Corporation, 

Walter  Wanger,  United  Artists.  Harry  M.  Warner,  Warner  Bros. 

MEMBERS 

Bray  Productions,  Inc.  Pioneer  Pictures,  Inc. 

The  Caddo  Co.,  Inc.  Principal  Pictures  Corporation. 

Columbia  Pictures  Corporation.  RCA  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc. 

Cosmopolitan  Corporation.  R-K-0  Radio  Pictures,  Inc. 

Cecil  B.  deMille  Productions,  Inc.  Reliance  Pictures,  Inc. 

Walt  Disney  Productions,  Ltd.  Hal  Roach  Studios,  Inc. 

Eastman  Kodak  Co.  Selznick  International  Pictures,  Inc. 

Educational  Films  Corporation  of  Amer-    Terrytoons,  Inc. 

ica.  Twentieth  Centurj'-Fox  Film  Corpora- 
Electrical  Research  Products,  Inc.  tion. 

First  National  Pictures,  Inc.  United  Artists  Corporation. 

Samuel  Goldwvn,  Inc.  Universal  Pictures  Co.,  Inc. 

D.  W.  Griffith^  Inc.  Vitagraph,  Inc. 

Inspiration  Pictures,  Inc.  Walter  Wanger  Productions,  Inc. 

Loew's,  Inc.  Warner  Bros.  Pictures,  Inc. 
Paramount  Pictures,  Inc. 

Officers,  Directors,  and  Members  of  the  Association  of  Motion  Picture 
Producers  of  California,  Inc." 

officers 
President 'L Y.    Frank    Freeman,    vice-presi- 
dent. Paramount. 

First  Vice-President Edgar    J.    Mannix,    producer   at 

M-G-M. 

Second  Vice-President Cliff  Work,  executive,  R-K-Ov, 

Executive  Vice-President  and  Secretary-Treas-    Fred  W.  Beetson. 
urer. 

directors 

Harry  Cohn President,  Columbia. 

Y.  Frank  Freeman Vice  president,  Paramount. 

Samuel  Goldwyn Producer   and   executive    United 

Artists. 

Edgar  J.  Mannix Producer  at  M-G-M. 

J.  R.  McDonough Vice  president,  R-K-O. 

'  "Film  Facts,"  published  by  the  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  New  York, 
1940. 


CONCENTRATION  OP  ECONOMIC  POWER  gg 

Hal  E.  Roach Producer,  member  United  Artists. 

James  Roosevelt 

Joseph  M.  Schenck Executive,  Twentieth  Century- 
Fox. 

Walter  F.  Wanger Producer,  member  United  Artists. 

J.L.Warner . Executive,    Warner    Bros.,    First 

National  Studios. 

Cliff  Work Executive,  R-K-0. 

MEMBERS 

Columbia  Pictures  Corporation.  Hal  E.  Roach  Studios,  Inc. 

Globe  Productions,  Inc.  Twentieth  Century-Fox  Film  Corpora- 
Samuel  Goldwyn,  Inc.,  Ltd.  tion. 

Loew's,  Incorporated.  Universal  Pictures  Company,  Inc.' 

Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.  Walter  Wanger  Productions,  Inc. 

RKO-Radio  Pictures,  Inc.  Warner  Brothers  Pictures,  Inc. 


286782 — 41 — No.  43- 


APPENDIX  III 

THE  CONSENT  DECREE 


APPENDIX  III 

THE  CONSENT  DECREE 

"And  the  return  of  an  industry  to  the  competitive  design  is  so  rare  a  product 
of  litigation.     *     *     *"  i 

After  years  of  charges  and  counter  charges  of  unfair  trade  practices 
by  members  of  the  motion  picture  industry  and  the  theater-going 
pubhc,  the  Department  of  Justice  on  July  20,  1938,  filed  a  petition 
in  equity  ^  against  the  five  major  producer-distributor-exhibitor  com- 
panies (Paramount,  Loew's,  Radio-Keith-Orpheum,  Warner  Bros., 
and  Twentieth  Century-Fox)  and  the  tlu-ee  large  producer-distributors 
(United  Artists,  Columbia,  and  Universal)  charging  them  with  com- 
bining and  conspiring  to  retrain  trade  and  commerce  in  the  production, 
distribution,  and  exhibition  of  motion  pictures  in  the  United  States, 
and  with  attempting  successfully  to  monopolize  such  trade  and  com- 
merce in  violation  of  the  Sherman  Act.  In  this  petition  and  in  its 
amended  and  supplemental  complaint  of  November  14,  1940,  the 
Department  of  Justice  listed  the  various  ways  by  which  it  allege  these 
purposes  were  accomplished. 

The  following  were  among  the  offenses  charged  against  the  eight 
companies : 

Mutual  loaning  of  production  personnel  and  equipment  without  extending  these 
privileges  to  independent  producers  on  the  same  terms. 

Fixing  of  license  terms  in  contracts  before  licensees  have  the  opportunity  to 
estimate  the  value  and  character  of  films  and  before  trade  .showing  or  completion 
of  films. 

Fixing  of  run,  clearance,  and  minimum  admission  price  terms. 

Conditioning  the  licensing  of  one  group  of  films  on  that  of  another. 

Conditioning  the  licensing  of  films  in  one  theater  upon  licensing  in  other  theaters 
under  common  ownership  or  control. 

Discrimination  with  respect  to  license  terms  granted  to  theaters  in  large  circuits 
because  they  are  part  of  a  circuit. 

In  discriminating  between  circuits  and  independent  theaters,  it  is  alleged  that 
these  companies^ — 

Make  exclusive  contracts  with  circuit  theaters  in  some  localities. 

Withhold  prints  to  give  circuit  theaters  clearance  not  agreed  to  in  contracts. 

Permit  negotiation  of  unfair  clearance  by  circuits. 

Set  minimum  admission  prices  of  independent  exhibitors  so  that  they  cannot 
successfully  compete  with  circuit  theaters. 

Prohibit  independent  exhibitors  from  playing  on  a  double-feature  program  a 
picture  previously  played  by  a  circuit  theater. 

Grant  selective  contracts  to  circuit  theaters  but  not  to  independents. 

Designate  play  dates. 

Force  short  subjects  aJid  newsreels  on  independent  theaters. 

Charge  independent  theaters  higher  film  rentals  than  circuits  in  equivalent 
situations. 

Partially  defray  advertising  costs  of  circuit  theaters,  but  not  those  of  inde- 
pendents. 

Require  that  independent  theaters,  but  not  circuit  theaters,  pay  score  charges. 

'  Temporary  National  Economic  Committee,  Monograph  16,  "Antitrust  in  Action,"  Walton  Hamilton 
and  Irene  Till,  1940,  p.  57. 
*  United  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  et  al.,  op.  eit. 

73 


74  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

Permit  circuit  theaters  to  modify  contract  terms  with  respect  to  film  rentals, 
transfer  of  pictures  from  one  theater  to  another,  cancelation  of  some  pictures  to 
permit  extended  run  on  more  successful  features,  and  the  like,  without  extending 
similar  privileges  to  independent  exhibitors. 

The  following  additional  charges  were  made  against  the  five  pro- 
ducer-distributor-exhibitor  companies: 

Conditioning  licensing  of  films  distributed  by  one  in  the  theaters  of  the  other  on 
the  licensing  of  films  of  the  other  in  the  theaters  of  the  former. 

Excluding  independent  productions  from  affiliated  theaters. 

Excluding  independent  exhibitors  from  operating  first-run  theaters  where 
affiliated  theaters  are  located. 

Excluding  independent  exhibitors  from  the  same  subsequent-run  as  affiliated 
theaters  in  cities  where  both  are  located. 

Using  affiliated  theaters  to  control  film  supph',  run,  clearance,  and  admission 
prices. 

Coercing  and  intimidating  independent  exhibitors  into  licensing  films  on 
arbitrary  terms  by  threatening  to  build  or  acquire  competing  theater. 

Coercing  and  intimidating  independent  exhibitors  into  relinquishing  part  or 
whole  interest  in  a  theater  to  one  of  the  affiliated  companies  by  threatening  to 
build  or  acquire  competing  theaters. 

Eliminating  competition  by  jointly  operating  theaters. 

Dividing  available  films  between  two  or  more  affiliated  theaters  in  the  same 
competitive  area,  thus  eliminating  competition. 

Refraining  from  competition  with  each  other  in  the  exhibition  field. 

To  end  these  conditions,  the  Department  of  Justice  asked  of  the 
court: 

*  *  *  That  each  of  the  contracts,  combinations,  and  conspiracies  in  restraint 
of  interstate  trade  and  commerce,  together  with  the  attempts  to  monopolize  and 
the  monopolization  of  the  same,  hereinbefore  described,  be  declared  illegal  and 
violative  of  the  Sherman  Act. 

*  *  *  That  the  defendants  herein,  their  subsidiaries  *  *  *  be  per- 
petually enjoined  and  restrained  from  continuing  to  carry  out,  directly  or  in- 
directly, expressly  or  impliedly,  the  attempts  at  monopolization,  the  monopolies 
and  all  restraints  of  said  interstate  trade  and  commerce  in  the  production,  distribu- 
tion, and  exhibition  of  motion  pictures  described  herein,  and  from  enteri?ig  into 
and  carrying  out,  directly  or  indirectly,  expressly  or  impliedly,  any  monopolies  or 
restraints  of  interstate  trade  and  commerce  similar  to  those  alleged  herein  to  be 
illegal. 

*  *  *  That  a  nation-wide  system  of  impartial  arbitration  tribunals  or  such 
other  means  of  enforcement  as  the  court  may  deem  proper  be  established  pursuant 
to  the  final  decree  of  this  court  in  order  to  secure  adequate  enforcement  of  whatever 
general  and  nation-wide  prohibitions  of  illegal  practices  may  be  contained  therein. 

*  *  *  That  the  integration  of  the  production  and  exhibition  branches  of  the 
industry  by  the  producer-exhibitor  defendants  herein,  and  each  of  them,  be 
declared  to  be  unlawful  as  an  instrumentality  of  monopoly  and  restraint  upon 
interstate  trade  and  commerce,  and  violative  of  the  Sherman  Anti-Trust  Act. 

*  *  *  That  the  defendants  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  Twentieth  Century- 
Fox  Film  Corporation,  Warner  Bros.  Pictures,  Inc.,  Loew's,  Inc.,  and  Radio- 
Keith-Orpheum  Corporation,  and  each  of  them,  under  the  direction  and  super- 
vision of  the  court  be  ordered  and  directed  to  divest  themselves  of  all  interest  and 
ownership,  both  direct  and  indirect,  either  in  theaters  and  theater  holdings  or  in 
production  and  distribution  facilities  and  that  they,  and  each  of  them  *  *  * 
be  permanently  enjoined  from  acquiring,  directly  or  indirectly,  any  other  interests 
in  the  branch  of  the  industry  divested  or  in  any  persons,  firms,  or  corporations 
which  are  engaged  or  may  engage  in  that  branch  of  the  industry;  said  divestiture 
to  be  accomplished  and  carried  out  upon  such  terms  and  conditions  as  the  court 
may  deem  proper. 

*  *  *  That  the  defendants  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  Twentieth  Century- 
Fox  Film  Corporation,  National  Theatre  Corporation,  Warner  Bros.  Pictures,  Inc., 
Warner  Bros.  Circuit  Management  Corporation,  Loew's,  Inc.,  Radio-Keith- 
Orpheum  Corporation,  Keith-Albee-Orpheum  Corporation,  R.  K.  O.  Proctor 
Corporation,  and  R-K-O  Midwest  Corporation  and  each  of  them  *  *  *  be 
ordered  and  directed  to  divest  themselves  of  all  inteiests  and  ownership,  both 
direct  and  indirect,  in  any  theaters  which  the  court  shall  find  have  been  u.sed  by 
one  or  more  of  them  to  unreasonabv  restrain  trade  and  commerce  in  motion 


CONCENTRATION  OF  EIOONOMIC  POWER  75 

pictures  in  violation  of  section  1  of  the  Sherman  Act  or  to  monopolize  trade  and 
commerce  in  motion  pictures  in  violation  of  section  2  of  the  Sherman  Act.     *    *     * 

The  parties  to  the  suit  went  through  the  usual  prehminary  maneu- 
vers appropriate  to  such  a  situation.  The  actual  trial,  orio:inally 
scheduled  to  begin  earl}'  in  1940,  was  postponed  several  times.  Finally, 
on  October  29,  the  Department  of  Justice  announced  that  the  five 
major  producer-distributor- exhibitor  companies  had  agreed  to  a 
consent  decree.  The  decree,  entered  by  the  court  on  November  20, 
1940,  ended  the  suit  for  the  five  affiliated  companies,  but  continued  it 
for  the  three  producer-distributor  companies  who  refused  to  assent 
to  it. 

With  respect  to  the  demand  of  the  Department  of  Justice  that 
exhibition  and  production  be  separated  (see  the  last  three  of  the  para- 
graphs quoted  above  from  the  complaint)  the  consent  decree  provided 
in  section  XXI: 

Petitioner,  by  its  counsel,  has  represented  to  the  Court  that  the  public  interest 
requires  that  the  provisions  of  this  decree  shall  operate  for  a  trial  period  of  three 
years  from  the  date  of  entry  hereof.  Petitioner  has  further  represented  to  the 
Court,  and  each  of  the  consenting  defendants  has  consented  to  the  entry  of  this 
decree  upon  the  condition,  that  Petitioner  will  not  for  a  period  of  three  years  after 
the  entry  of  this  decree,  either  in  this  action  or  any  other  action  or  proceeding 
against  any  such  defendant  seek  either  the  relief  or  any  thereof  prayed  in  *  *  * 
the  Petition  filed  herein  July  20,  1938,  o»  in  *  *  *  the  Amended  and  Sup- 
plemental Complaint  filed  herein  November  14,  1940,  or  otherwise  seek  to  divorce 
the  production  or  distribution  of  motion  pictures  from  their  exhibition;  or  to 
dissolve  any  such  defendant  or  any  corporation  in  which  any  such  defendant  has, 
directly  or  indirectly,  a  substantial  stock  interest  and  which  is  engaged  in  the 
exhibition  of  motion  pictures  or  holds  directly  or  indirectly  a  substantial  stock 
interest  in  any  corporation  so  engaged,  or  to  dissolve  or  break  up  any  circuit  of 
theaters  of  any  such  defendant  or  of  any  such  corporation,  or  to  require  any  such 
defendant,  corporation  or  circuit  to  divest  itself  of  its  interests  or  any  thereof, 
direct  or  indirect,  in  motion-picture  theaters  in  which  it  had  an  interest  at  the 
date  of  the  entry  of  this  decree. 

This  particular  demand,  then,  that  exhibition  and  production  be 
separated,  was  thus  withdrawn. 

The  decree  embodies  a  number  of  agreements  intended  to  modify 
or  eliminate  the  undesirable  features  of  certain  industry  practices. 
With  respect  to  block  booking,  the  consenting  distributors  agree  that 
after  August  31,  1941,  they  will  sell  films  in  blocks  of  not.  more  than 
five  pictures  each,  and  will  make  sale  of  each  block  in  no  way  contin- 
gent on  the  sale  of  any  other  block.  To  eliminate  blind  selling,  it  is 
agreed  that  after  the  same  date  all  pictures  will  be  previewed  in  each 
exchange  area  prior  to  sale.  The  distributors  further  agree:  To  cease 
forcing  shorts,  reissues,  westerns,  newsreels,  and  the  like;  to  consider 
only  the  theaters  in  each  exchange  area  in  contract  negotiations  with 
a  circuit;  to  submit  to  arbitration  any  questions  of  unfair  clearance; 
to  permit  cancelation  of  features  for  cause;  and  to  cease  acquiring  new 
theaters  as  part  of  anj'-  general  program  of  theater  acquisition. 

The  decree  also  contains  several  escape  clauses.  These  have  special 
reference  to  the  agreements  to  sell  in  blocks  of  not  more  than  five 
pictures  and  to  trade  show  all  features.  The  most  important  of  these 
stipulates  that,  if  prior  to  June  1,  1942,  restrictions  at  least  as  stringent 
have  not  been  placed  on  the  activities  of  the  three  producer-distributors 
not  consenting  to  the  decree,  these  provisions  shall  become  inoperative 
after  September  1,  1942,  with  respect  to  the  consenting  defendants. 

On  November  14,  1940,  before  the  consent  decree  was  entered,  a 
formal  hearing  on  it  was  held  by  the  court.     At  this  time,  other  per- 


76  CONCEJVTRATION  OF  E'CONOMIC  POWER 

sons  interested  in  the  outcome  of  the  Government's  suit  were  per- 
mitted to  express  their  opinions.  Representatives  of  virtually  every 
important  exhibitor  association  in  the  industry  and  of  the  three  non- 
consehtirtg  defendants  expressed  opposition  to  the  decree.  The 
opposition  was  so  unanimous  that  one  of  the  Government's  attorneys 
said:   "The  court  seems  to  have  more  friends  than  the  decree."  ^ 

Soon  after  this,  the  Motion  Picture  Research  Council  and  various 
groups  interested  in  improving  the  moral  standards  of  motion  picture 
entertainment  also  condemned  the  decree. 

The  press  release  in  which  the  Department  of  Justice  originally 
announced  the  filing  of  an  antitrust  suit  against  the  major  motion 
picture  companies  stated: 

Suit  may  develop  need  for  congressional  action. — Until  thg  evidence  is  produced, 
it  is  too  early  to  state  whether  the  antitrust  laws  by  themselves  are  sufficiently 
effective  to  restore  competitive  conditions.  If  it  appears  from  such  evidence  that 
further  aid  is  needed,  the  results  of  the  investigation  and  trial  will  be  brought  to 
the  attention  of  Congress. 

The  Department  desires  that  this  suit  result  in  the  clarification  of  the- antitrust 
laws  with  respect  to  the  motion  picture  industry. 

The  application  of  the  general  principles  of  the  antitrust  laws  to  particular 
industries  demands  distinctions  which  cannot  be  drawn  in  advance  of  the  produc- 
tion of  actual  proof.  They  can  only  be  staked  out  with  respect  to  particular 
industries  through  the  clarifying  process  of  judicial  action.  This  is  the  purpose 
of  this  suit.'* 

Nevertheless,  section  I  of  the  consent  decree  reads  in  part  as  follows: 

The  Petitioner  not  having  offered  any  proof  of  its  allegations  that  defendants 
have  violated  the  antitrust  laws,  and  defendants  having  denied  each  and  every 
such  allegation,  this  Court  has  not  determined  or  adjudicated  and  by  this  decree 
does  not  determine  or  adjudicate,  and  this  is  not  a  decree  to  the  effect  that  any  of 
said  defendants  has  violated  or  is  now  violating  any  of  such  laws,  or  any  other 
statute;  and  this  decree  relates  solely  to  future  conduct  herein  below  specified  and 
is  not  based  upon  any  finding,  determination,  or  adjudication  that  any  right  or 
statute  has  yet  been  or  is  now  being  violated. 

The  entrance  of  the  consent  decree  thus  insures  that  any  proof 
which  the  Department  of  Justice  may  have  had  of  evidence  of  violation 
of  the  antitrust  laws  by  the  five  major  companies  will  not  be  presented 
to  the  court  and  will  not  become  available  to  the  general  public  or  to 
the  Congress.  Moreover,  any  evidence  which  might  indicate  that  the 
problems  of  the  industry  cannot  be  met  within  the  existing  framework 
of  the  antitrust  laws  is  likewise  not  disclosed.  The  efforts  of  the 
Department  of  Justice  in  gathering  and  sifting  information  over  a 
period  of  years  are  thus  nullified.  Neither  the  Congress  nor  other 
interested  parties  are  able  to  draw  on  this  experience  in  order  to 
appraise:  (a)  The  extent  or  validity  of  complaints  of  combination  in 
the  industry;  (b)  the  extent  to  which  a  consent  decree  will  correct 
these  conditions;  (c)  the  extent  to  which  additional  or  different  rem- 
edies are  necessary  to  restore  a  healthier  competitive  situation. 

A  further  aspect  of  the  consent  decree  may  be  indicated.  The 
provisions  of  the  decree  with  respect  to  trade  showing  and  block 
booking  represent  a  major  concession  on  the  part  of  the  five  affiliated 
companies.  As  stated,  however,  these  provisions  are  to  become 
inoperative  after  August  31,  1942,  unless  prior  to  that  time  conditions 
at  least  as  restrictive  have  been  either  consented  to  or  imposed  by  the 
court  on  the  three  satellite  producing  companies — Columbia,  Universal, 
and  United  Artists.     The  continuation  of  these  concessions  is  thus  in 

\3  "Variety,"  November  20,  1940. 
*  Release,  Department  of  Justice,  July  20, 1938. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  77 

no  small  part  contingent  on  the  strength  of  the  Government's  case 
agaiS  these  three  companies.  None  of  these  companies  owns  or 
operates  theaters.  Each  is  smaller  than  any  of  the  five  affiliated 
companies  It  is  obvious  that  many  of  the  complaints  of  unfair 
prSs  which  might  be  made  and  provecl  with  respect  to  the  five 
affiliated  companies  are  in  no  way  applicable  to  t^icse  three 

The  Government's  case  against  these  threo  companies  is.  therefore 
necessarily  very  much  weaker  than  it  is  against  any  one  of  the  other 
five  pri  lucer-distributor-exhibitors.  In  one  sense  then  the  major 
companies  by  making  certain  concessions,  have  been  able  to  negotiate 
a  s^^sin  of  the  Government's  suit  for  a  period  of  at  least  3  years 
while  at  the  same  time  the  extent  of  these  concessions  is  limited  by  the 
siiccess  of  the  Government  in  prosecuting  a  much  weaker  case 

Ffnally  it  has  been  shown  in  the  body  of  this  report  that  the 
misise  of  economic  power  attained  by  linking  together  numerous 
^parate  operating  units  into  large  and  powerful  organizations  has 
b?en  Responsible  for  many  of  those  features  and  practices  of  the  indus- 
trv  which  are  undesirable  from  the  consumers'  standpoint.  It  is 
efevin  tP  point  out,  then,  that  the  decree  does  not  create  any  new 
competing  units;  rather,  it  freezes  the  present  competitive  situation. 
r^mTtir  of  fact,  onl.  of- the  escape. clauses  is  designed  to  reheve 
the  consenting  companies  from  certain  of  the  restrictions  ol  the 
decree  should  any  marked  change  in  present  relationships  occur. 

The  remaining  pages  of  this  appendix  are  devoted  to  a  brief  analysis 
of  the  rektlon  of  various  provisions  of  the  decree  to  certam  industry 
practices. 

*  * 

BLOCK  BOOKING  AND  BLIND  SELLING 

With  respect  to  blind  selling,  section  III  of  the  consent  decree 
provides:  *    *    * 

No  consenting  defendant  engaged  in  the  distribution  of  motion  pictures 
^hflll  license  or  offer  for  license  a  feature  motion  picture     *  .    ^^r  P;  "V^ 

exh  b  fon  witWn  the  United  States  of  An.erica  at  whi^oh  ^"  f  "--^"J^district 
be  charged,  until  the  feature  has  been  trade  shown  within  the  exchange  district 
in  which  the  public  exhibition  is  to  be  held. 

The  purpose  of  this  section  is  to  enable  exhibitors  and  interested 
public  welfare  groups  to  learn  about  pictures  before  contracts  for 

^^The""  decree's  answer  to  the  problems  raised  by  block  booking  is 
contained  in  section  IV  (a),  which  provides: 

No  distributor  defendant  shall  offer  for  license  or  shall  license  more  than  five 
fealres'ina'sTngle' group.  In  offering  its  features  f-.  l-^^^  f,,^^t'may  from 
distributor  may  change  the  combinations  of  features  m  groups  ^^J^*  ^fJ^^^^^J 
time  to  time  determine,  and  may  license  or  offer  ^^^  li«\n«^.^f^I"l^"^ns|'o^ 
features  as  it  may  from  time  to  time  determine  provided  that  ^he  hcense  or  oner 
for  license  of  one  group  of  features  shall  not  be  conditioned  upon  the  licensing 
of  another  feature  or  group  of  features. 

This  provision  does  not  eliminate  block  booking.  It  merely  limits 
the  size  of  blocks  to  5  or  less  rather  than  40  or  50  features^ 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  distributor  is  specifically  left  free  to  deter- 
mine which  features  shall  be  grouped  to  form  these  .bfo^ks^nd  that 
he  is  not  required  to  offer  blocks  of  identical  composition  to  difterent 
or  competing  theaters.  Each  exhibitor,  of  course,  is  free  to  negotiate 
for  such  combinations  of  pictures  as  he  may  desire  out  of  all  those 


78  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

released  by  a  distributor.  At  the  same  time,  it  may  be  assumed  that 
the  distributor  will  try  to  use  a  good  picture  of  proved  box-office  merit 
to  ''carry"  four  others  that  lack  sufficient  appeal  to  sell  themselves. 

Moreover,  it  is  probable  that  even  such  cancelation  privileges  as 
the  exhibitor  previously  received  will  be  eliminated  by  this  method  of 
selling.  It  is  true  that  section  VII  of  the  decree  provides  machinery 
for  cancelation  of  certain  pictures,  but  only  on  the  grounds  that  they 
are  generally  offensive  on  moral,  racial,  or  religious  grounds  in  the 
particular  localities  in  which  the  theaters  are  located,  and  only  then 
after  an  arbitration  hearing,  if  this  is  requested  by  the  distributor. 

There  is  thus  a  real  question  as  to  whether  the  ability  of  the  exhibi- 
tor to  select  exactly  tJiose  pictures  he  desires  will  be  materially 
improved  by  this  method  of  marketing.  It  is  because  of  this  that  the 
decree  has  been  uniformly  opposed  by  the  groups  interested  in  im- 
proving the  moral  standards  of  film  entertainment. 

The  provision  has  another  feature  which  exhibitors  consider 
undesirable.  It  will  be  remembered  that  continuity  of  film  supply  is 
an  important  factor  to  each  exhibitor,  and  that  the  exhibitor  generally 
does  not  oppose  block  booking  as  such  but  only  its  compulsory 
aspects.  This  provision,  exhibitors  fear,  will  jeopardize  the  con- 
tinuous flow  of  product  on  which  stable  operation  depends.  The 
independent  exhibitor  associations  which  appeared  before  the  Court 
before  the  decree  was  entered  attacked  the  blocks-of-five  provision 
principally  for  this  reason,  and  stated  that  an  unrestricted  20  percent 
cancelation  privilege  would  be  far  more  useful  to  them. 

The  exact  effect  which  this  method  of  sale  will  have  on  film  prices  is 
uncertain.  Films  will  now  be  sold  not  only  in  the  fall  when  attendance 
is  high,  but  also  during  the  box-office  doldrums  in  the  summer  and  in 
Lent.  Also,  the  distributor  will  be  impelled  to  make  contracts 
promptly  after  previewing,  since  the  price  of  features  tends  to  decline 
with  time.  Moreover,  with  greater  control  of  their  playing  time 
exhibitors  may  feel  more  free  to  fill  in  with  occasional  satisfactory 
independent  productions.  By  shrewd  trading  exhibitors  may  be  able 
to  improve  their  position.  On  the  other  hand,  the  distributor  may 
use  uncertainty  regarding  future  film  supply  to  drive  a  hard  bargain 
with  the  exhibitor.  It  is  also  quite  probable  that  this  method  of 
selling  will  to  some  extent  increase  sales  expense  and  that  this  will  be 
reflected  in  higher  prices. 

There  is  one  definite  result.  The  independent  exhibitor  has  com- 
plained that  because  of  having  to  purchase  the  full  output  of  several 
distributors,  he  occasionally  has  been  required  to  license  more  features 
during  the  year  than  actually  needed  to  operate  his  theater.  Under 
the  present  system  the  exhibitor  cannot  be  confronted  at  the  end  of 
the  season  with  a  bill  for  a  number  of  unplayed,  unpaid  for  features 
except  as  a  result  of  his  own  actions. 

Sections  III  and  IV  (a)  are  considerably  weakened  by  an  escape 
clause  (sec.  XII)  which,  depending  on  a  number  of  eventualities, 
relieves  the  five  major  companies  from  these  restrictions  after  August 
31,  1942.  In  the  first  place,  these  sections  will  become  inoperative 
if,  before  June  1,  1942,  the  three  other  defendants  in  the  suit — 
Columbia,  Universal,  and  United  Artists — are  not  subject  to  similar 
conditions.  If  any  difl'erent  conditions  are  imposed  on  these  three 
companies,  any  one  of  the  five  ittajor  companies  may  elect  to  observe 
similar  restrictions,  if  it  so  desires. 


OOX'CENTRATION  OP  BOONOMIC  POWER  79 

Subdivision  (g)  of  section  XII  assumes  that  all  eight  companies 
will  have  been  brought  under  the  decree  by  June  1,  1942,  since  these 
paragraphs  only  become  operative  after  September  1,  1943.  Sub- 
division (g)  relieves  the  signatories  from  the  trade  showing  and 
blocks-of-five  provisions  of  the  decree  if  25  percent  or  more  of  the 
features  released  for  exhibition  in  the  United  States  are  distributed 
by  other  means,  or  if  12}^  percent  or  more  of  the  total  gross  income 
from  film  rentals,  excluding  the  gross  income  of  States'  right  exchanges, 
is  derived  frojn  pictures  licensed  otherwise  than  in  accordance  with 
sections  III  and  IV  (a). 

Subdivision  (h)  goes  into  eft'ect  after  September  1,  1942.  After 
this  date  sections  III  and  IV  (a)  become  inoperative  if  the  competition 
of  those  using  methods  of  sale  contrary  to  these  provisions  "has 
substantially  and  adversely  affected"  the  business  of  any  one  of  the 
consenting  defendants. 

Subdivision  (g)  and  (h)  together  agree,  in  effect,  that  if  the  pro- 
visions with  respect  to  block  booking  and  blind  selling  are  successful 
in  permitting  new  competition  to  the  major  producers  to  develop, 
these  companies  will  be  free  to  return  to  these  methods  in  order  to 
stifle  this  new  competition. 

Finally,  the  signatories  are  released  from  the  trade  showing  and 
blocks-of-five  provisions  of  the  decree  if  at  any  time  an  Act  of  Congress 
requiring  trade  showing  or  limiting  the  number  of  feature  pictures 
which  may  be  licensed  in  a  block  is  passed.  Considering  all  these 
avenues  of  escape,  it  seems  improbable  that  these  provisions  will  be 
in  effect  for  a  very  long  period  of  time. 

FORCING    OF    SHORTS    AND    FOREIGNS 

Section  IV  (b)  of  the  consent  decree  states: 

No  distributor  defendant  shall  require  an  exhibitor  to  license  short  subjects, 
Tiewsreels,  trailers,  or  serials  (*  *  *  collectively  referred  to  as  shorts)  as  a 
condition  of  licensing  features.  No  distributor  defendant  shall  require  nn  ex- 
hibitor to  license  reissues,  westerns,  or  foreigns  (*  *  *  collectively  referred  to 
as  foreigns)  as  a  condition  of  licensing  other  features. 

On  the  surface  this  appears  to  be  an  unequivocal  response  to  the 
exhibitors'  complaint  against  forcing  of  shorts,  news  reels,  serials  or 
westerns.  However,  there  is  no  requirement  regarding  the  way  in 
which  such  subjects  shall  be  licensed.  Presumably,  sales  will  be 
made  in  as  large  a  block  as  possible  and  at  the  beginning  of  a  season. 
Features,  on  the  other  hand,  will  be  almost  necessarily  sold  throughout 
the  year.  There  is  no  assurance  that  a  distributor  wall  view  sympa- 
thetically the  feature-picture  requirements  of  an  exhibitor  who  has 
failed  to  contract  for  short  subjects. 

Claims  that  licensing  of  features  has  been  made  conditional  upon 
execution  of  a  short  subject  contract  may  be  arbitrated.  But  it  will, 
be  a  most  difficult  matter  to  relate  the  price  paid  for  feature  pictures 
during  a  season  to  a  contract  which  may  or  may  not  have  be«n 
entered  into  for  short  subjects  at  some  previous  time. 

BUYING    POWER 

Section  V  is  aimed  at  decentralization  of  circuit  buying  power, 
inasmuch  as  it  requires  a  circuit  with  theaters  in  more  than  one 
exchange  area  to  make  individual  contracts  for  its  theaters  in  each 


80  CONCENTRATION  OF  E'CONOMIC  POWER 

district,  and  it  requires  that  the  contract  in  one  area  not  be  conditioned 
on  a  contract  in  another.  However,  circuit  contracts  can  still  be 
negotiated  at  the  main  office  of  the  circuit. 

It  may  be  mentioned  that  an  exchange  area  is  not  a  small  territory. 
Thirty-one  exchange  areas  cover  the  entire  United  States.  The  buy- 
ing power  of  all  the  theaters  of  a  single  circuit  located  in  one  exchange 
area  is  thus  likely -to  be  no  small  factor  in  contract  negotiations.  This 
provision,  therefore,  stops  a  long  way  short  of  requiring  bargaining  for 
films  on  a  local  basis. 

EXCLUSIVE    EXHIBITION    RIGHTS 

Section  VI  provides  that  no  major  distributor  shall  refuse  to  license 
pictures  to  an  exhibitor  on  some  run  "upon  terms  and  conditions  fixed 
by  the  distributor  which  are  not  calculated  to  defeat  the  purpose  of 
this  section."  The.  exhibitor  must  be  able  to  "satisfy  reasonable 
minimum  standards  of  theater  operation"  and  "be  reputable  and 
responsible."  The  provision  is  qualified  in  that  the  distributor  may 
refuse  to  grant  a  run  to  an  exhibitor  if  this  "will  have  the  effect  of 
reducing  the  distributors  total  film  revenue  in  the  competitive  area  in 
which  such  exhibitor's  theater  is  located."  The  burden  of  proof  that 
granting  such  a  run  has  reduced  the  distributor's  total  film  revenue 
in  the  area  rests  on  the  distributor. 

This  provision  is  an  attempt  to  answer  exhibitors'  charges  that  in 
some  areas,  independent  theaters  have  been  unable  to  operate  in  com- 
petition with  circuit  theaters  because  the  major  companies  have 
refused  to  provide  them  with  any  pictures.  The  distributors'  answer 
to  this  charge  has  been  that  pictures  have  been  refused  only  when 
operation  of  an  additional  theater  was  uneconomical  and  tended  to 
reduce  their  entire  revenue  from  the  area.  It  will  be  noted  that  in 
the  actual  application  of  this  provision,  the  prospective  exhibitor 
must  be  prepared  to  bid  more  than  the  difference  between  the  circuit's 
offer  for  exclusive  exhibition  rights  and  for  first-run  privileges  only, 
since  relief  is  subject  to  the  condition  that  the  distributor's  total 
revenue  be  not  reduced. 

CLEARANCE 

■  Section  VIII  of  the  decree  provides  that — 

Controversies  arising  upon  the  complaint  of  an  exhibitor  that  the  clearance 
apolicable  to  his  theater  is  unreasonable  shall  be  subject  to  arbitration  under  the 
following  provisions: 

It  is  recognized  that  clearance,  reasonable  as  to  time  and  area,  is  essential 
the  distribution  and  exhibition  of  motion  pictures. 

In  determining  whether  any  clearance  complained-  of  is  unreasonable,  the 
arbitrator  shall  take  into  consideration  the  following  factors  and  accord  to  them 
the  importance  and  weight  to  which  each  is  entitled,  regardless  of  the  order  in 
which,  they  are  listed: 

(1)  The  historical  development  of  clearance  in  the  particular  area  wherein  the 
theaters  involved  are  located;  (2)  The  admission  prices  of  the  theaters  involved; 
(3)  The  character  and  location  of  the  theaters  involved,  including  size,  type  of 
entertainment,  appointments,  transit  facilities,  etc.;  (4)  The  policy  ot  the  theaters 
involved,  such  as  the  showing  of  double  features,  gift  nights,  give-aways,  pre- 
miums, cut  rate  tickets,  lotteries,  etc.;  (5)  The  rental  terms  and  license  fees  paid 
by  the  theaters  involved  and  the  revenues  derived  by  the  distributor  defendant 
from  such  theaters;  (6)  The  extent  to  which  the  theaters  involved  compete  with 
each  other  for  patronage;  and  (7)  AH  other  business  considerations,  except  that 
the  arbitrator  shall  disregard  the  fact  that  a  theater  involved  is  affiliated  with  a 
distributor  or  with  a  circuit  of  theaters. 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER  gl 

When  an  arbitration  proceeding  is  instituted,  the  arbitrator  must 
first  decide  if  clearance  is  unreasonable.  If  his  decision  is  in  the 
affirmative,  he  is  then  empowered  to  fix  the  maximum  clearance 
period  which  may  be  granted  in  subsequent  licensing  agreements. 

The  clearance  granted  by  a  distributor  to  theaters  in  which  he  has  a 
financial  interest  is  not  subject  to  arbitration.  Clearance  on  so-called 
"specials"  which  includes  pictures  which  may  be  roadshown  at 
advanced  prices  is  also  exempted  from  arbitration. 

Any  distributor  or  exhibitor  affected  by  an  arbitration  award  may 
institute  new  proceedings  at  any  time  on  the  grounds  that  conditions 
have  changed  so  as  to  require  modification  of  the  original  award. 

This  provision  represents  a  very  real -concession  to  exhibitors  who 
have  complained  of  unfair  clearance  restrictions.  It  probably  reflects 
an  opinion  by  the  major  companies  that  their  long  run  interest  is  best 
served  by  equitable  clearance  schedules. 

WITHHOLDING  DELIVERY  OF  PRINTS 

Section  IX  of  the  decree  provides  that  distributors  shallnot  withhold, 
from  an  exhibitor  delivery  of  prints  available  in  its  exchange  in  order 
to  give  a  competing  exhibitor  a  prior  playing  date  not  provided  for  in 
his  license.  A  strict  interpretation  of  this  provision  would  indicate 
that  it  applied  only  as  between  two  exhibitors  playing  on  the  same 
run.  It  would  not  apply,  for  example,  to  delay  in  delivery  to  give  a 
prior-run  exhibitor  a  longer  clearance  period.  Whether  this  strict 
interpretation  was  intended  or  whether  it  will  be  adopted  i*  uncertain. 

RUN 

Section  X  provides  that: 

Controversies  arising  upon  a  complaint  by  an  independent  exhibitor  that^a 
distributor  defendant  has  arbitrarily  refused  to  license  its  features  for  exhibition 
on  the  run  requested  by  said  exhibitor     *     *     *     shall  be  subject  to  arbitration. 

This  provision  is  hemmed  about  with  so  many  restrictions  as  immedi- 
ately to  limit  its  application  to  a  very  small  number  of  cases.  In 
many  situations  it  will  be  meaningless. 

In  the  first  place,  it  applies  only  to  theaters  which  were  in  existence 
or  which  replaced  a  theater  in  existence  on  the  day  the  decree  was 
entered — November  20,  1940.  Secondly,  complaints  may  be  entered 
only  by  independent  exhibitors  who  are  defined  in  this  clise  as  exhibi- 
tors "wholly  ind.ependent  of  any  circuit  of  more  thaii  five  theaters." 
Beyond  these  restrictions,  it  is  expressly  stipulated  that  no  arbitration 
award  shall  be  entered  unless: 

The  distributor  refused  to  license  pictures  on  the  run  requested  for 
a  period  of  not  less  -than  3  successive  months;  the  run  desired  was 
enjoyed  by  a  circuit  theater  (a  circuit  is  defined  as  consisting  of  not  less 
than  15  theaters) ;  features  sufficient  in  nature  and  quantity  to  enable 
the  complainant's  theater  to.  operate  on  the  run  requested  were  not 
available;  the  complainant  operated  his  theater  on  the  same  run  or 
an  earlier  run  than  the  one  requested  between  July  20,  1935,  and 
July  20,  1940,  or  subsequent  to  July  20,  1940,  and  during  the  two  con- 
secutive motion-picture  seasons  immediately  preceding  the  complaint 
the  complainant  operated  his  theater  on  the  same  run  as  or  on  an  earlier 
run  than  that  enjoj^ed  by  the  circuit  theater  and  during  such  period 
exhibited  substantially  all  the  features  released  during  the  period  by  the 


g2  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

distributor,  or  subsequent  to  July  20,  1935,  and  prior  to  July  20,  1940, 
the  complainant  demanded  from  the  distributor  the  particular  run  or 
an  earlier  run,  in  writing,  or  filed  a  similar  complaint  with  a  local 
clearance  and  zoning  board  under  the  N.  R.  A.  which  was  not  disposed 
of  by  administrative  decision  under  the  code  prior  to  May  27,  1935 
(a  similar  complaint  by  a  prior  operator  of  a  theater  is  acceptable 
provided  the  present  complainant  operated  the  theater  specified  for 
at  least  1  year  prior  to  the  entry  of  the  decree) ;  and  iinally  refusal  to 
license  pictures  on  the  run  requested  by  the  complainant  was  in  fact 
because  the  run  had  been  given  to  a  circuit  theater. 

After  listing  all  these  preliminary  restrictions  on  the  exact  char- 
acter of  the  exhibitor  who  may  be  entitled  to  file  a  complaint,  the 
consent  decree  goes  on  to  list  those  factors  which  should  be  taken  into 
account  by  the  arbitrator  in  making  his  award.  These  are  the  usual 
considerations  which  one  might  expect  would  wholly  determine  the 
playing  'position  of  a  theater.  The  many  restrictions  listed  would 
appear  to  serve  no  useful  purpose  beyond  one  of  limiting  the  exhibitors 
who  might  request  proceedings  to  improve  their  run. 

Finally,  if  the  arbitrator  decides  that  a  complaint  is  justified,  he 
may  enter  an  award  against  the  distributor,  but  this  does  not  guar- 
antee any  improvement  over  past  procedure.  The  award  simply 
requires  that  in  the  future  the  distributor  shall  not  license  pictures  to 
the  circuit  theater  on  the  run  in  question  unless  the  contract  or  agree- 
ment is  separate  and  not  a  part  of  any  contract  or  agreement  for  the 
licensing  of  features  in  any  other  theater.  This,  of  course,  does  not 
guarantee  that  the  complainant  will  get  the  run  he  desires. 

After  a  final  award  has  been  made,  the  complainant  is  permitted  to 
file  another  arbitration  proceeding  on  the  grounds  that  "such  award 
has  not  been  complied  with  in  good  faith  by  the  distributor  against 
whom  it  was  entered."  If  the  arbitrator  in  this  proceeding  finds  that 
the  distributor  has  failed  to  comply  with  the  previous  award,  the 
arbitrator  may .  award  compensatory  damages  to  the  complaining 
exhibitor  for  any  loss  he  has  suffered  because  of  the  distributor's  failure 
to  comply  with  the  original  award.  This  new  arbitration  proceeding 
must  be  instituted  within  60  days  after  the  alleged  violation  has 
occurred,  and  the  damages  which  may  be  awarded  can  apply  only  to 
losses  in  the  60-day  period. 

The  extremely  careful  restrictions  with  which  the  possibility  of 
arbitration  of  nm  has  been  hedged  about  contrast  most  curiously  with 
the  forthright  treatment  accorded  arbitration  of  clearance.  In  this 
connection,  it  may  be  recalled  that  most  of  the  afiiliated-theater 
interests  are  in  prior  runs.  Since  some  clearance  must  always  exist 
between  runs  (it  is  recognized  in  section  VIII  that  "clearance  reason- 
able as  to  time  and  area  is  essential  in  the  distribution  and  exhibition 
of  motion  pictures"),  it  appears  that  the  affiliated  interests  were 
willing  to  make  some  concessions  with  respect  to  clearance,  but  were 
most  reluctant  to  admit  the  possibility  of  any  widespread  disturbance 
of  their  control  of  the  profitable  prior  runs. 

FURTHER    ACQUISITION    OF    THEATERS 

As  stated  earlier  in  this  appendix,  one  of  the  declared  objectives  of 
the  antitrust  suit  filed  against  the  major  companies  was  to  compel 
them  to  divest  themselves  of  their  theater  holdings.  The  consent 
decree  makes  no  such  proposal;  instead  ui  section  XI  it  provides  that: 


CONCENTRATION  OP  ECONOMIC  POWER  §3 

For  a  period  of  3  j^ears  after  the  entry  of  the  decree  herein  each  of  the  consenting 
defendants  will  notify  the  Department  of  Justice  immediately  of  any  legally 
binding  commitment  for  the  acquisition  by  it  of  any  additional  theater  or  theaters. 

During  such  period  each  such  defendant  will  also  report  to  the  Department  of 
Justice  *  *  *  the  changes  in  its  theater  position,  if  any  *  *  *  as 
follows,  together  with  a  statement  of  the  reasons  for  such  changes. 

(o)  Theaters  contracted  to  be  built,  or  under  construction;  (6)  theaters  lost 
or  disposed  of;  (c)  theaters  acquired;  (d)  interests  in  theaters  acquired,  with  a 
statement  of  the  nature  and  extent  of  such  interests. 

*  *  *  For  a  period  of  3  years  following  the  entry  of  this  decree,  no  con- 
senting defendant  shall  enter  upon  a  general  program  of  expanding  its  theater 
holdings.  Nothing  herein  shall  prevent  any  such  defendant  from  acquiring 
theaters  or  interests  therein  to  protect  its  investment  or  its  competitive  position 
or  for  ordinary  purposes  of  its  business. 

This  last  provision,  requiring  a  decision  as  to  whether  one  of  the 
defendants  has  acquired  a  theater  "for  ordinary  purposes  of  its  b\jsi- 
ness,"  or  for  some  other  purpose,  renders  the  whole  provision  vague 
if  not  meaningless. 

Proceedings  based  on  a  violation  of  this  subdivision  *  *  *  shall  be  only  by 
application  to  the  Court  for  injunctive  relief  against  the  consenting  defendant 
complained  against,  which  shall  be  limited  to  restraining  the  acquisition,  or 
ordering  the  divestiture,  of  the  theaters  or  interests  therein,  if  any,  about  to  be 
acquired,  or  acquired,  in  violation  of  this  section. 

ARBITRATION 

The  decree  deals  with  a  number  of  points  of  friction  which  have 
arisen  between  the  major  companies  and  independent  exhibitors.  In 
most  of  these  cases  arbitration  of  any  disputes  is  stipulated.  Accord- 
ingly, the  decree  sets  up  elaborate  arbitration  machinery.  The  Amer- 
ican Arbitration  Association  is  appointed  administrator  of  the  arbi- 
tration system.  The  association  is  required  to  set  up  a  panel  of  not 
less  than  10  impartial  arbitrators,  and  a  clerk  in  each  city  in  which 
3  or  more  of  the  defendants  maintain  exchanges. 

Elaborate  and  detailed  rules  of  arbitration  are  given.  In  any  case 
subject  to  arbitration,  proceedings  may  be  instituted  by  filing  a 
demand  accompanied  by  a  fee  of  $10  with  the  appropriate  local  arbi- 
tration tribunal.  Each  party  in  an  arbitration  proceeding  must  de- 
posit for  every  day  or  part  of  a  day  that  the  hearing  lasts  an  amount 
equal  to  the  arbitrator's  per  diem  fee  which  is  not  to  exceed  $50  per 
day.  The  expenses  are  to  be  paid  by  the  party  against  whom  the 
award  is  made.  Extensive  powers  are  awarded  the  arbitrator  to  in- 
sure the  attendance  of  witnesses,  to  examine  books  and  records,  and 
to  secure  such  information  as  he  may  deem  necessary  to  guide  him  in 
making  a  decision. 

An  appeals  board  is  to  be  set  up  consisting  of  three  members  of 
"known  impartiality  and  distinction"  to  be  appointed  by  the  court. 
The  decision  of  any  arbitration  proceeding  may  be  taken  to  the  appeals 
board  by  filing  with  the  local  secretary  a  fee  of  $25  and  three  copies  of 
the  record  of  the  arbitration  hearing.  The  cost  of  obtaining  the 
record  must  be  borne  by  the  appellant. 

The  arbitration  system  is  to  be  financed  in  part  by  the  filing  fees 
and  expenses  collected  in  the  arbitration  hearings.  The  principal 
burden  of  the  system,  however,  will  be  shouldered  by  the  five  major 
companies.  Each  of  these  will  be  assessed  proportionately  to  their 
annual  gross  receipts  from  film  rentals.  The  budget  for  the  first  year 
is  set  at  not  more  than  $490,000. 


g4  CONCENTRATION  OF  ECONOMIC  POWER 

All  provisions  of  the  consent  decree  dealing  with  trade  practices  are 
to  be  enforced  solely  through  arbitration  proceedings  instituted  by  an 
injured  party.  Only  in  the  case  of  a  general  program  of  theater 
acquisition  in  violation  of  the  decree  is  it  provided  that  reference  will 
be  taken  directly  to  the  court.  In  this  case  the  Department  of  Justice 
is  limited  to  a  request  for  injunctive  relief  to  consist  of  an  order  pro- 
hibiting the  acquisition  of  particular  theaters  or  divestiture  if  an 
agreement  has  been  consummated. 

The  defendant  companies  and  their  agents  in  section  II  are  enjoined 
from  violating  any  of  the  provisions  of  the  degree.  However,  section 
XVI  states: 

.  No  consenting  defendant  and  no  officer,  director,  agent  or  employee  of  any 
such  defendant,  shall  be  deemed  to  have  violated  Any  provision  of  this  decree 
if  the  arbitration  of  disputes  or  controversies  arising  relative  to  the  subject  matter 
thereof  is  herein  provided  for,  unless  such  defendant  has  refused  to  arbitrate  such 
a  dispute  or  controversy  in  the  manner  and  under  the  conditions  specified  in  this 
decree  and  in  the  Rules  of  Arbitration  and  Appeals  which  are  filed  herewith,  as 
amended  from  time  to  time,  or  has  failed  or  refused  to  abide  by  and  perform  the 
final  award  made  and  entered  in  such  an  arbitration  proceeding. 

Tlxns,  while  the  consenting  defendants  are  prohibited  from  certain 
actions  by  one  part  of  the  decree,  a  second  section  permits  them  to 
continue  these  practices  unless  in  a  particular  instance  the}^  refuse  to 
submit  to  arbitration  or  to  abide  by  an  award  following  arbitration. 

Ordinarily,  enforcement  of  a  consent  decree  is  assumed  by  the 
Department  of  Justice.  When  the  Department  feels  that  a  pro- 
vision of  a  decree  has  been  violated,  the  Department  can  ask  that 
the  violator  be  adjudged  in  contempt  of  court  and  request  that  an 
a^jpropriate  penalty  be  imposed.  It  appears  that  in  this  case  the 
Department  has  specifically  resigned  these  powers.  Enforcement 
of  the  decree  is  instead  imposed  on  the  members  of  the  industry 
and  to  a  considerable  extent  on  the  weaker  members  of  the  industry. 

It  is  true  that  the  fee  required  to  file  a  case  is  not  large.  However, 
the  necessity  of  depositing  each  day  an  amount  equal  to  the  per  diem 
expense  of  the  arbitration  proceeding  may  impose  a  real  financial 
burden  on  the  sn^all  exhibitor;  a  not  inconsiderable  sum  may  be  in- 
volved if  extended  hearings  are  required.  Moreover,  the  provision 
that  the  loser  in  an  arbitration  proceeding  must  pay  for  the  expenses 
of  the  hearing  will  certainly  tend  to  discourage  any  smaller  members  of 
the  industry  from  filing  a  complaint  ot  doubtful  validity,  and  some 
element  of  risk  will  always  be  involved. 

Moreover,  any  award  may  be  appealed  by  either  of  the  parties  to 
the  appeals  board  which  may  at  its  option  order  oral  hearings.  The 
appeals  board  will  be  located  in  New  York  City,  and  hearings  will 
be  held  only  n  that  place.  The  expense  of  defending  an  appeal  may 
thus  be  not  inconsiderable. 

The  extent  to  which  the  various  provisions  of  the  decree  will  be 
enforced  thus  depends  to  some  extent  on  the  willingness  of  small 
exhibitors  to  risk  amounts  of  money  which  to  them  may  be  relatively 
quite  important.  And  in  many  cases  the  financial  gain  to  be  expected 
even  from  a  favorable  a^ward  may  be  quite  small. 

In  connection  with  enforcement  of  the  decree  through' arbitration 
proceedings,  it  hiay  be  noted  that  the  power  of  the  arbitrator  in  mak- 
ing awards  is  quite  limited.  In  most  cases  the  arbitrator  can  do  no 
more  than  find  that  a  provision  of  the  decree  has  been  violated  and 
require  that  the  violator  discontinue  the  practice.     In  onlv  two  cases 


CONCENTRATION  OF  ~E<X)NOMIC  POWER  85 

is  the  arbitrator  empowered  to  impose  a  fine  on  a  distributor  violating 
the  decree,  and  this  fine  in  either  case  is  not  to  exceed  the  sum  of 
$500.  Fines  may  be  imposed  where  a  distributor  has  made  the  sale 
of  features  contingent  upon  the  sale  of  short  subjects  or  foreigns  or 
other  features,  and  where  the  buying  power  of  a  circuit  in  more  than 
one  exchange  area  has  been  considered  by  the  distributor  in  film 
negotiations. 

In  only  one  case  can  the  arbitrator  award  damages  to  an  exhibitor 
and  then  only  to  the  extent  that  the  exhibitor  can  prove  financial  loss 
during  a  60-day  period  by  reason  of  the  distributor's  failure  to  comply 
with  the  previous  award.  In  most  cases,  then,  the  distributor  in 
continuing  a  practicfe  in  violation  of  the  decree  has  only  to  fear  finan- 
cial loss  to  the  extent  of  the  expenses  of  an  arbitration  hearing.  In 
no  case  can  he  be  faced  by  contempt  proceedings  in  a  Federal  court. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  contempt  procedure  method  of  enforcement 
of  a  consent  decree  is  time-consuming  and  sometimes  awkward  and 
expensive.  The  application  of  this  method  to  the  enforcement  of  a 
decree  affecting  many  thousands  of  transactions  occurring  in  every 
part  of  the  United  States  each  year  might  prove  wholly  unsatisfac- 
tory. The  limited  resources  and  personnel  available  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  Justice  for  work  of  this  character  is  not  to  be  ignored.  More- 
over, the  record  of  the  contempt  procedure  method  as  a  device  for 
securing  enforcement  of  a  consent  decree  is  not  wholly  impressive.* 
There  is  thus  room  for  argument  that  as  between  enforcement  of  the 
decree  by  contempt  procedure  or  by  arbitration,  the  latter,  while  it 
leaves  much  to  be  desired,  is  to  be  preferred. 

'  Cf.  Temporary  National  Economic  Committee,  Monograph  16,  pp.  88-97. 


286782—41 — No.  43- 


INDEX 

lage 

Aircraft  Pictures  Corporation 59 

American  Arbitration  Association 83-85 

American  Telephone  &  Telegraph  Co 7 

Association  of  Motion  Picture  Producers  of  California,  Inc 67-69 

Call  bureau 68 

Central  Casting  Bureau 67 

Officers  and  members 68,  69 

Association  of  Motion  Pictures,  Inc 14 

Aylesworth,  M.  H ^' 8 

Balaban,  Barney 48,  68 

Balaban,  John 48 

Balaban  &  Katz  Corporation 13,39,43,48,49,59 

Beetson,  Fred  W 68 

Bertrand,  Daniel m.  ix 

B.  F.  Keith  Corporation 61 

Big  U  Film 62 

Biograph 3,  4 

Blanchard,  E.  L --      ni,  ix 

Blind  selling.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Block-booking.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Blumberg,  Nate  J 68 

Borthwick,  George 68 

Bowery  &  East  River  National  Bank 14 

Bray  Productions,  Inc 68 

Breen,  Joseph  I 65 

Butterfield  Theatre  Circuit 59 

Caddo  Co..  Inc 68 

Call  Bureau.     {See  Association  of  Motion  Picture  Producers  of  California, 
■  Inc.) 

Call  Bureau  and  Central  Casting  Corporation 14 

C.  B.  C.  Film  Sales  Corporation . 62 

Cecil  B   de  Mille  Productions,  Inc 68 

Censorship.     {See  Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America. 

Inc.) 
Central  Casting  Bureau,     {See  Association  of  Motion  Picture  Producers  of 

California,  Inc.) 

Chadwick,  S.  E.. 24 

Chase  National  Bank  of  the  City  of  New  York 60 

Circuits.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Clayton  Act . xi 

Clearance.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Cochrane,  R.  H - | 

Cohn,  Harry 68 

Cohn,  Jack 68 

Cale   HA        _                --                                                    - 4o 

Columbia  PictuVeVCorporatYonV_lIII'I'"IIIIIIir8,'9,l4,'62^  68,  69,  73,  76,  78 

Conclusions.     {See  Motioji-picture  industry,  observations.) 

Contracts.     (See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Control.     (<See  Motion-picture  industry.)  • 

Cosmopolitan  Corporation -  -----  "° 

Crowder,  Walter  F.:  Concentration  of  production  in  manufacturing  (1940); 

ciijGci                                           _                ._«.-  — .-.  — - -  —  — - —  —  —  —  -  XI 

Danielian,  A.  R.:  A.  T.  &  T.,  the  story  of  industrial  conquest;  cited 7 

"Darron  Board."     {See  National  Recovery  Review  Board.) 


88 


INDEX 


Page 

D.  W.  Griffith,  Inc . . 68 

de  Mille,  Cecil  B_-: .._  68 

Eastman  Kodak  Co 4,  68 

Edison  Co 3,  4 

Educational  Films  Corporation  of  America 68 

Electrical  Research  Products,  Inc 7,  68 

Essanay . 4 

Evans,  W.  Duane - iii,  ix 

Exhibitors.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Famous  Players-^ Lasky  Corporation-- 5,  26,  59 

Fairbanks.  Douglas j 61 

F-B-0  Productions,  Inc 61 

Federal  Trade  Commission :  Docket  No.  835 ;  cited 26 

Federal  Trade  Commission  v.  Paramount  Famous-Lasky  Corporation;  cited.  26 

Film  daily  (June  7,  1940);  cited 17 

Film  Daily  Yearbook : ■_.._ 13,  16 

Film  facts  (1940);  cited 25,  67,  68 

First  National  Exhit?itors  Circuit 5,  6,  7 

First  National  Pictures,  Inc . 68,  69 

Forcing.     (See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Fortune  (August  1939);  cited 15 

Fox,  William 4 

Fox  Film  Co 7,8,9,  12,  14,  15,39,60,74 

Fox  West  Coast  Theatres  Corporation 36 

Fox  Wisconsin  circuit 13 

Freeman,  Y.  Frank . '. 68 

General  Electric  Co . 7 

General  Film  Co i.-  4 

Giannini,  Attilio  H 14 

Globe  Productions,  Inc 69 

Goldwyn,  Samuel ^ 61,  68 

Goldwyn  Pictures  Corporation 60 

Griffith  Amusement  Co - 62 

Hal  Roach  Studios,  Inc ■ 68,  69 

Hall  Room  Boys  Photoplays,  Inc ^ 62 

Hamilton,  Walton  and  Till,  Irene:  Antitrust  in  action  (1940);  cited 73 

Hammons,  E.  W . . ..  68 

Hatrick,  E.  B 1  68 

Hays,  WillH 65,68 

"Hays  organization."     (See  Motion   Picture  Producers  and  Distributors 
of  America,  Inc.) 

Herron,  Frederick  L ^ 68 

Independent  Theatre  Owners  Association,  Inc 30 

Inspiration  Pictures,  Inc 68 

Interstate  Circuit,  Inc. 45,  46 

Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  et  al.  v.  The  United  States  of  America;  cited 46,  47 

Interstate  Theater  Corporation 37 

Irving  Trust  Co 61 

Jacobs,  Lewis:   The  rise  of  the  American  film  (1939);  cited 3,  6,  7 

Johnston,  W.  R 8 

Kalem . 4 

Katz,  Sam 48 

Keith-Albee-Orpheum  Corporation 61,  74 

Kennedy,  Joseph  P.:  Storv  of  the  films  (1927),  cited 14 

Kent,  S.  R \ . 8,68 

Kleine,  George 4 

Korda,  Alexander 61 

Kreps,  Theodore  J ix 

Kuykendall,  E 8 

Legion  of  Decency 65 

Lesser,  Sol i 68 

Lewis,  Howard  T.:   The  motion-picture  industry  (1933);  cited 3 

Lippmann,  Walter : 34 

Loew's  Consolidated  Enterprises  - 59 

Loew's,  Inc 8-16,  39,  49,  59,  60,  68,  69,  73,  74 

Loew's  Theatrical  Enterprises 59,  60 


INDEX  89 

Page 

Louis  B.  Mayer  Pictures,  Inc 60 

Lowell,  A.  Lawrence 34 

Lubin , 4 

Lynch,  S.  A 13 

Lyric  Theater . 28 

McDonough,  J.  R 68 

Mannix,  Edgar  J _         68 

Melies 4 

Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer  Corporation 7,  47,  60 

Metro-Goldwyn  Pictures  Corporation 60 

Metro  Pictures  Corporation 60 

MilHken,  Carl  E 68 

Motion  Picture  Almanac  (1935-36);  cited 65 

Motion-picture  industry: 

Arbitration 83-85 

Blind  selling ._  22,30-34,77-79 

Block-booking . 22-26,  77-79 

Charges  against- 73,  74 

Circuits passim 

Clearance  and  zoning 40-45,  73,  80,  81 

Consent  decree 73-85 

Consumer  consideration 23,  24,  29,  45,  56 

Dates  of  exhibition  fixed 22,  34,  35 

Distribution  to  exhibitors 3-6,  9-16,  19-47,  73-85 

Expansion ^ 5,  6 

Forcing  of  short  films 22-30,  74,  79 

Geographical  spheres  of  control 14-16,  74 

Hays     organization.      {See     Motion     Picture     Producers     and    Dis- 
tributors of  America,  Inc.) 

Independent  exhibitors 1 passim 

Major  companies 8,  59-62,  73,  74 

Monopolistic  practices ^ passim 

Nature  of  study ix 

Number  of  companies ^ ..  8 

Observations : 53-56 

Origin 3 

Overbuying 36-39 

Run 81,82 

Score  charge ^ 35,  73 

Selective  contracts 39,  73 

Sound  pictures 6,  7,  35 

Specified  admission  prices 40,  41,  45-47,  73 

Talent  exchange 13,  14,  16,  73 

Theater  ownership _.•-  __  6-16,  35,  73,  74,  82,  83 

Trade  practices 21-49,  73,  74 

Motion  Picture  Patents  Co . 4,  7 

Motion  Picture  Producers  and  Distributors  of  America,  Inc 6,  17,  25,  65-69 

Advertising  Advisory  Council ^--- 66 

Community  service  department 67 

Conservation  department 67 

Copyright  bureau 67 

Film  boards  of  trade ^ 67 

Foreign  department 67 

Generai  counsel 67 

Legal  department 67 

Office  of  the  president 67 

Officers  and  members 68 

Production  Code  Administration , 66 

Public  information  department *67 

Title  registration  bureau 66 

Theater  service  department 67 

Treasury  and  accounting  department .       67 

Motion  Picture  Research  Council ^ 76 

Motion  Picture  Theatre  Owners  of  America 8 

Motion  Picture  Yearbook  (1940);  cited 45 

Movietone 7 


9Q  INDEX 

Page 

National  Industrial  Recovery  Act 7 

National  Recover}^  Administration: 

Code  of  Fair  Competition  for  the  Motion  Picture  Industry 7, 

8,  26,  30,  34,  36,  38,  39,  44 

The  motion-picture  industry  study  (1936) 3,  26,  30,  34,  37 

National  Recovery  Review  Board:   Report  relating  to  the  motion-picture 

industry  (1934);  cited 8,  26 

National  Theatres  Corporation 60,  74 

Neely  bill 25,  32 

New  England  Theatres,  Inc . 59 

New  York  Herald  Tribune  (January  12,  1935);  cited 34 

Observations  on  motion-picture  industry.     (See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

O'Donnell,  R.  J 46 

O'Mahoney,  Joseph  C ix 

O'Reilly,  C.  L . . .- 8 

Oriental  Theatre  Co. 48 

Orpheum  Circuit,  Inc 61 

Overbuying.     (See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Palace  Theater 37,  38 

Paramount-Famous-Lasky  Corporation 59 

Paramount  Pictures  Corporation 5-16,  39,  45,  48,  59,  68,  69,  73,  74 

Paramount  Pictures,  Inc 59 

Paramount  Publix  Corporation 59 

Path6  Exchange,  Inc . 4,  61 

Photophone 7 

Pickford,  Mary 5,  61 

Pioneer  Pictures,  Inc ' 68 

Prices.     (See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Principal  Pictures  Corporation 68 

Printers'  Ink  (May  3,  1928) ;  cited xii 

Production  Code  of  Ethics 65 

Protection.     (See  Motion-picture  industry,  clearance  and  zoning.) 

Radio  Corporation  of  America . 7 

Radio-Keith-Orpheum  Corporation.  _^ 7-16,  47,  61,  73,  74 

Ramsaye,  Terry:  A  Million  and  One  Nights  (1926);  cited 3 

R.  C.  A.  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc 68 

References  to  literature  and  sources: 

1.  Crowder,  W.  F.:  Concentration  of  Production  in  Manufacturing 

(1940);  cited xi 

2^Danielian,  A.  R.:  A.  T.  &  T.,  the  Story  of  Industrial  Conquest; 

-^  cited XI 

3.  Federal  Trade  Commission:  Docket  No.  835;  cited 26 

4.  Federal  Trade  Commission  v.  Paramount-Famous-Lasky   Corpora- 

tion; cited 26 

5.  Film  Dailv  (June  7,  1940);  cited 17 

6.  Film  Daily  Yearbook 13,  16 

7.  Film  Facts  (1940);  cited 25,67,68 

8.  Fortune  (August  1939);  cited 15 

9.  Hamilton,  W.  and  Till,  I.:  Antitrust  in  Action  (1940);  cited 73 

10.  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  et  al.  v.  The  United  States  of  America;  cited.  46,  47 

11.  Jacobs,  L.:  The  Rise  of  the  American  Film  (1939);  cited 3,6,7 

12.  Kennedy,  J.  P.:  Story  of  the  Films  (1927);  cited 14 

13.  Lewis,  H.  T.:  The  Motion-Picture  Industry  (1933);  cited 3 

14.  Motion-Picture  Almanac  (1935-36) ;  cited 65 

15.  Motion-Picture  Yearbook  (1940);  cited 45 

16.  National  Recovery  Administration:  The  Motion-Picture  Industry 

Study  (1936) 3,26,30,34,37 

17.  National  Recovery  Review  Board:  Report  relating  to  the  motion- 

picture  industry  (1934) :  cited 8,  26 

18.  New  York  Herald  Tribune  (January  12,  1935);  cited 34 

19.  Printers'  Ink  (May  3,  1928);  cited xii 

20.  Ramsaye,  T.:  A  Million  and  One  Nights  (1926);  cited -...  3 

21.  Standard  Trade  and  Securities  (Febuftrv  20,  1935);  cited 7 

22.  Stevens,  W.  H.  S.t  Unfair  Competition  (1917);  cited. -.._.-. 14 

23.  Tegu's  Palace  Theatre,  Inc.  v.  Interstate  Theatre  Corporation,  et  al.; 

cited . .. 3*7 


INDEX  91 

References  to  literature  and  sources — Continued. 
Temporary  National  Economic  Committee: 
Monogra}:-!!  No.  16.      {See  Hamilton,  W.) 
Monograph  No.  27.      {See  Crowder,  W.  F.)  Page 

24.  United  States  Congress:   Resolutions;  cited 25,26 

25.  United  States  House  of  Representatives,  Committee  on  Interstate 

and  Foreign  Commerce:  Hearings;  cited 24,  27,  28,  31,  33,  46 

United  States  Senate: 

26.  Committee  on  Interstate   Commerce,  subcommittee:  Hear- 

ings ;  cited 67 

27.  Finance  Committee:  Hearings;  cited 30 

28.  United  States  Department  of  Commerce,  Bureau  of  Foreign  and 

Domestic  Commerce:   Motion  pictures  abroad  (March  15,  1940) ; 

cited 34 

29.  United  States  Department  of  Justice:  Press  release  (July  20,  1938) ; 

cited 1 76 

30.  United  States  Supreme  Court:  Opinion;  cited 45 

31.  United  States  v.  Balaban,  et  al 39,  43,  49 

32.  United  States  v.  Crescent  Amusement  Company,  Inc.,  et  aL-. 48 

33.  United  States  v.  First  National  Pictures,  et  al 67 

34.  United  States  v.  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc.,  et  al 45,  47 

35.  United  States  v.  Paramount  Pictures,  Inc.,  et  al 9-16,  36,  59,  73 

36.  United  States  of  America  v.  Fox  West  Coast  Theaters  Corporation, 

et  al 36 

37.  United  Tobacco  Journal  (April  28,  1928) ;  cited xii 

38.  Variety  (November  20,  1940);  cited 76 

39.  Youngclaus  v.  Omaha  Film  Board  of  Trade;  cited 44 

Reliance  Pictures,  Inc 68 

Republic I 8 

R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co ^ xii 

R-K-0  Midwest  Corporation 61,  74 

R-K-0  Proctor  Corporation 61,  74 

R-K-0  Radio  Pictures,  Inc 61,68,69 

Roach,  Hal  E . 68,  69 

Roosevelt,  James 69 

Roosevelt  Theatre--    ^ 49 

Schaefer,  G.  J 8,  68 

Samuel  Goldwyn,  Inc 68,  69 

Schenck,  Joseph  M 69 

Scbenck,  N.  M 68 

Sckenck,  R.  H.. 8 

Schine  chain 64 

Screen  Snapshots,  Inc 62 

Selig ----  4 

Selznick  International  Pictures,  Inc 68 

Sherman  Act ix,  44,  47,  73-75 

Silverstone,  Maurice - 68 

Skouras,  Spyros 17 

Southern  Enterprises,  Inc 59 

Sparks,  E.  J 13 

Standard  Statistics  Co 7 

Standard  trade  and  securities  (February  20,  1935);  cited 7 

Stanley  Co.  of  America 60 

Star  Theater 37 

Starland  Revue,  Inc 62 

Stevens,  W.  H.  S.:  Unfair  competition  (1917);  cited 14 

Tegu's  Palace  Theatre,  Inc.  v.  Interstate  Theatre  Corporation,  et  al.;  cited..  37 
Temporary  National  Economic  Committee: 

Monograph  No.  16:  Antitrust  in  action  (1940);  cited 73,  85 

Monograph  No.  27:  Structure  of  industry  (1940);  cited xi 

Terry  toons,  Inc 68 

Texas  Consolidated  Theaters 45,  46 

Theaters.      {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 

Theatre  Owners  Chamber  of  Co'nmerce,  N.  Y 8 

Till,  Irene,  joint  author.     {See  Hamilton,  W.) 

Trade  practices.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.) 


INDEX 
^^  Page 

XI,  XII 

Trusts --^-''^Vrr:  WnVr^nVfltion  ■  r 8-i i,  36,  60,  68,  69,  73,  74 

Twentieth  Century-Fox  Film  Corporation o  ^^ 

Twentieth  Century  Pictures,  Inc _   _;         j_^^ 

United  Artists  Corporation 14 '23 '39 '53 'm,  60,  62,  68,  69,  73,  76,  78 

United  States  Congress,  House  R^solutiorg,;^S^^^^^^^  I^Sl^^nd  Domestic  '''  '' 

United  States  Department  "^  Commerce   Burea^^^^^^  34 

Commerce :  Motion  pictures  abroad  (March  lb    ly^uj  ^.^^^  ^^ 

United  States  Department  of  ^^^^'f.l'^'^'cTm^^^^^^  and 

United  States  House  of  Representatives,  L^ommittee  o  ^^^  ^^^  ^^^  ^^   ^^  ^^ 

Un^?etl?at?rSre?Co^mSe=oflnte.Ta^^^^  ,, 

UiSsSe^^:^;  Fh^c^  Committee:  Hean^  -         f. 

United  States  Supreme  Court:  Opinion ;  cited '. .  39,  43,  49 

United  States  v.  Balaban,  et  at -  -  -  -  -    -,  4g 

fSSi  States  V.  Crescent  Amusement  Company,  Inc.,  et  al 

uJted  States  v.  First  National  P;ct-res,etal ] : :  1 1 '_ "_  ]  —   45,  47 

United  States  v.  Interstate  Circuit,  Inc^,et  at ^^  ^^^  73 

United  Tobacco  Journal  (April  28,  1928) .  cited ^2 

Universal  Chain  Theatres  Corporation g2 

Universal  Corporation ---                _      _      62 

Universal  Film  Exchanges,  Inc     62 

Universal  Film  Manufacturing  Co 62 

Universal  Pictures  Co,  Inc   72q'ir28'47,'62,  68,  69,  73,  76,  78 

Universal  Pictures  Corporation /   y,  it,  ^o,      -      -      ' g^ 

Van  Buren  Corporation 76 

Variety  (November  20,  1940);  cited 3,4,60,68 

Vitagraph,  Inc , .///..- J. 

Vitaphone -  - "  _   68 

Walt  Disnev  Productions,  Ltd 68,69 

Walter  Wanger  Productions,  Inc 68,  69 

Wanger,  Walter '     "' _   68 

Warner,  A 6^i6'39,  43,  60,  61,  68,  69,  73,  74 

Warner  Brothers  Pictures,  Inc o-io,  oy,  t  ,  . ggg 

Warner,  H.  M 69 

Wrr^erBrotes  Circuit  Management  CorpoVa^^^^ :::::::::::::  '^60 

Wesco  Corporation 60 

West  Coast  Theatres,  Inc 7 

Western  Electric  Co " 68,69 

Work,  Cliff 1 -  8,28 

^r^^0UVF^[n.-W^^7Vade/  

Zoning.     {See  Motion-picture  industry.)                           __  5 

Zukor,  Adolph 


...iiiii  , 

3  9999  06351  930  8